|
36
|
1 *options.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Dec 09
|
|
7
|
2
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
|
|
5
|
|
|
6
|
|
|
7 Options *options*
|
|
|
8
|
|
|
9 1. Setting options |set-option|
|
|
|
10 2. Automatically setting options |auto-setting|
|
|
|
11 3. Options summary |option-summary|
|
|
|
12
|
|
|
13 For an overview of options see help.txt |option-list|.
|
|
|
14
|
|
|
15 Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to
|
|
|
16 achieve special effects. These options come in three forms:
|
|
|
17 boolean can only be on or off *boolean* *toggle*
|
|
|
18 number has a numeric value
|
|
|
19 string has a string value
|
|
|
20
|
|
|
21 ==============================================================================
|
|
|
22 1. Setting options *set-option*
|
|
|
23
|
|
|
24 *:se* *:set*
|
|
|
25 :se[t] Show all options that differ from their default value.
|
|
|
26
|
|
|
27 :se[t] all Show all but terminal options.
|
|
|
28
|
|
|
29 :se[t] termcap Show all terminal options. Note that in the GUI the
|
|
|
30 key codes are not shown, because they are generated
|
|
|
31 internally and can't be changed. Changing the terminal
|
|
|
32 codes in the GUI is not useful either...
|
|
|
33
|
|
|
34 *E518* *E519*
|
|
|
35 :se[t] {option}? Show value of {option}.
|
|
|
36
|
|
|
37 :se[t] {option} Toggle option: set, switch it on.
|
|
|
38 Number option: show value.
|
|
|
39 String option: show value.
|
|
|
40
|
|
|
41 :se[t] no{option} Toggle option: Reset, switch it off.
|
|
|
42
|
|
|
43 :se[t] {option}! or
|
|
|
44 :se[t] inv{option} Toggle option: Invert value. {not in Vi}
|
|
|
45
|
|
|
46 *:set-default* *:set-&* *:set-&vi* *:set-&vim*
|
|
|
47 :se[t] {option}& Reset option to its default value. May depend on the
|
|
|
48 current value of 'compatible'. {not in Vi}
|
|
|
49 :se[t] {option}&vi Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi}
|
|
|
50 :se[t] {option}&vim Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi}
|
|
|
51
|
|
|
52 :se[t] all& Set all options, except terminal options, to their
|
|
10
|
53 default value. The values of 'term', 'lines' and
|
|
7
|
54 'columns' are not changed. {not in Vi}
|
|
|
55
|
|
|
56 *:set-args* *E487* *E521*
|
|
|
57 :se[t] {option}={value} or
|
|
|
58 :se[t] {option}:{value}
|
|
|
59 Set string or number option to {value}.
|
|
|
60 For numeric options the value can be given in decimal,
|
|
|
61 hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0')
|
|
|
62 (hex and octal are only available for machines which
|
|
|
63 have the strtol() function).
|
|
|
64 The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by
|
|
|
65 default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is
|
|
|
66 set). See |cmdline-completion|.
|
|
|
67 White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and
|
|
|
68 will be ignored. White space between '=' and {value}
|
|
|
69 is not allowed.
|
|
|
70 See |option-backslash| for using white space and
|
|
|
71 backslashes in {value}.
|
|
|
72
|
|
|
73 :se[t] {option}+={value} *:set+=*
|
|
|
74 Add the {value} to a number option, or append the
|
|
|
75 {value} to a string option. When the option is a
|
|
|
76 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
|
|
|
77 value was empty.
|
|
|
78 If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags
|
|
|
79 are removed. Otherwise there is no check for doubled
|
|
|
80 values. You can avoid this by removing a value first.
|
|
|
81 Example: >
|
|
|
82 :set guioptions-=T guioptions+=T
|
|
|
83 < Also see |:set-args| above.
|
|
|
84 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
85
|
|
|
86 :se[t] {option}^={value} *:set^=*
|
|
|
87 Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend
|
|
|
88 the {value} to a string option. When the option is a
|
|
|
89 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
|
|
|
90 value was empty.
|
|
|
91 Also see |:set-args| above.
|
|
|
92 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
93
|
|
|
94 :se[t] {option}-={value} *:set-=*
|
|
|
95 Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove
|
|
|
96 the {value} from a string option, if it is there.
|
|
|
97 If the {value} is not found in a string option, there
|
|
|
98 is no error or warning. When the option is a comma
|
|
|
99 separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option
|
|
|
100 becomes empty.
|
|
|
101 When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be
|
|
|
102 exactly as they appear in the option. Remove flags
|
|
|
103 one by one to avoid problems.
|
|
|
104 Also see |:set-args| above.
|
|
|
105 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
106
|
|
|
107 The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated. For example: >
|
|
|
108 :set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3
|
|
|
109 If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given
|
|
|
110 and the following arguments will be ignored.
|
|
|
111
|
|
|
112 *:set-verbose*
|
|
|
113 When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it
|
|
|
114 was last set. Example: >
|
|
|
115 :verbose set shiftwidth cindent?
|
|
|
116 shiftwidth=4
|
|
|
117 Last set from modeline
|
|
|
118 cindent
|
|
|
119 Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim
|
|
|
120 This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":set
|
|
|
121 all" or ":set" without an argument.
|
|
|
122 When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message. There is only
|
|
|
123 one value for all local options with the same name. Thus the message applies
|
|
|
124 to the option name, not necessarily its value.
|
|
|
125 When the option was set while executing a function, user command or
|
|
|
126 autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported.
|
|
|
127 Note that an option may also have been set as a side effect of setting
|
|
|
128 'compatible'.
|
|
|
129 {not available when compiled without the +eval feature}
|
|
|
130
|
|
|
131 *:set-termcap* *E522*
|
|
|
132 For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a termcap option. This will
|
|
|
133 override the value from the termcap. You can then use it in a mapping. If
|
|
|
134 the "xx" part contains special characters, use the <t_xx> form: >
|
|
|
135 :set <t_#4>=^[Ot
|
|
|
136 This can also be used to translate a special code for a normal key. For
|
|
|
137 example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this: >
|
|
|
138 :set <M-b>=^[b
|
|
|
139 (the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it)
|
|
|
140 The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations.
|
|
|
141
|
|
36
|
142 The t_xx options cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
143 security reasons.
|
|
|
144
|
|
7
|
145 The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi. Long string options are put
|
|
10
|
146 at the end of the list. The number of options is quite large. The output of
|
|
7
|
147 "set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the
|
|
|
148 |more-prompt|.
|
|
|
149
|
|
|
150 *option-backslash*
|
|
|
151 To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a
|
|
|
152 backslash. To include a backslash you have to use two. Effectively this
|
|
|
153 means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded
|
|
|
154 down).
|
|
|
155 A few examples: >
|
|
|
156 :set tags=tags\ /usr/tags results in "tags /usr/tags"
|
|
|
157 :set tags=tags\\,file results in "tags\,file"
|
|
|
158 :set tags=tags\\\ file results in "tags\ file"
|
|
|
159
|
|
10
|
160 The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command. To
|
|
|
161 include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead. This example sets the
|
|
7
|
162 'titlestring' option to "hi|there": >
|
|
|
163 :set titlestring=hi\|there
|
|
|
164 This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there": >
|
|
|
165 :set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there
|
|
|
166
|
|
10
|
167 For MS-DOS and WIN32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed. More
|
|
7
|
168 precise: For options that expect a file name (those where environment
|
|
|
169 variables are expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not
|
|
|
170 removed. But a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma,
|
|
|
171 etc.) is used like explained above.
|
|
|
172 There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\": >
|
|
|
173 :set dir=\\machine\path results in "\\machine\path"
|
|
|
174 :set dir=\\\\machine\\path results in "\\machine\path"
|
|
|
175 :set dir=\\path\\file results in "\\path\file" (wrong!)
|
|
|
176 For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes
|
|
|
177 are halved. This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be
|
|
10
|
178 halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept. The third gives a
|
|
7
|
179 result which is probably not what you want. Avoid it.
|
|
|
180
|
|
|
181 *add-option-flags* *remove-option-flags*
|
|
|
182 *E539* *E550* *E551* *E552*
|
|
|
183 Some options are a list of flags. When you want to add a flag to such an
|
|
|
184 option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this: >
|
|
|
185 :set guioptions+=a
|
|
|
186 Remove a flag from an option like this: >
|
|
|
187 :set guioptions-=a
|
|
|
188 This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'.
|
|
10
|
189 Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time. If 'guioptions' has
|
|
7
|
190 the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba"
|
|
|
191 doesn't appear.
|
|
|
192
|
|
|
193 *:set_env* *expand-env* *expand-environment-var*
|
|
22
|
194 Environment variables in specific string options will be expanded. If the
|
|
7
|
195 environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable
|
|
|
196 name is replaced with its value. If it does not exist the '$' and the name
|
|
|
197 are not modified. Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may
|
|
|
198 follow the environment variable name. That character and what follows is
|
|
|
199 appended to the value of the environment variable. Examples: >
|
|
|
200 :set term=$TERM.new
|
|
|
201 :set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,.
|
|
|
202 When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set
|
|
|
203 opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing.
|
|
|
204
|
|
|
205
|
|
|
206 Handling of local options *local-options*
|
|
|
207
|
|
|
208 Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer. Each window or buffer
|
|
|
209 has its own copy of this option, thus can each have their own value. This
|
|
|
210 allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another. And set
|
|
|
211 'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another.
|
|
|
212
|
|
|
213 The following explains what happens to these local options in specific
|
|
|
214 situations. You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses
|
|
|
215 the option values you would expect. Unfortunately, doing what the user
|
|
|
216 expects is a bit complicated...
|
|
|
217
|
|
|
218 When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window. Thus
|
|
|
219 right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same.
|
|
|
220
|
|
|
221 When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized. Since
|
|
|
222 the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer,
|
|
|
223 these are not used. Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a
|
|
|
224 global value, which is used for new buffers. With ":set" both the local and
|
|
|
225 global value is changed. With "setlocal" only the local value is changed,
|
|
|
226 thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer.
|
|
|
227
|
|
|
228 When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the last used window
|
|
|
229 options are used again. If this buffer has been edited in this window, the
|
|
|
230 values from back then are used. Otherwise the values from the window where
|
|
|
231 the buffer was edited last are used.
|
|
|
232
|
|
|
233 It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer.
|
|
|
234 When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep
|
|
|
235 using these local window options. Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the
|
|
|
236 local window options, which is used when editing another buffer. Each window
|
|
|
237 has its own copy of these values. Thus these are local to the window, but
|
|
|
238 global to all buffers in the window. With this you can do: >
|
|
|
239 :e one
|
|
|
240 :set list
|
|
|
241 :e two
|
|
|
242 Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list"
|
|
|
243 command you have also set the global value. >
|
|
|
244 :set nolist
|
|
|
245 :e one
|
|
|
246 :setlocal list
|
|
|
247 :e two
|
|
|
248 Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global
|
|
|
249 value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the
|
|
|
250 global value. Note that if you do this next: >
|
|
|
251 :e one
|
|
|
252 You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited
|
|
10
|
253 "one". The options local to a window are not remembered for each buffer.
|
|
7
|
254
|
|
|
255 *:setl* *:setlocal*
|
|
|
256 :setl[ocal] ... Like ":set" but set only the value local to the
|
|
|
257 current buffer or window. Not all options have a
|
|
|
258 local value. If the option does not have a local
|
|
|
259 value the global value is set.
|
|
|
260 With the "all" argument: display all local option's
|
|
|
261 local values.
|
|
|
262 Without argument: Display all local option's local
|
|
|
263 values which are different from the default.
|
|
|
264 When displaying a specific local option, show the
|
|
|
265 local value. For a global option the global value is
|
|
|
266 shown (but that might change in the future).
|
|
|
267 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
268
|
|
|
269 :setl[ocal] {option}< Set the local value of {option} to its global value.
|
|
|
270 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
271
|
|
|
272 *:setg* *:setglobal*
|
|
|
273 :setg[lobal] ... Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local
|
|
|
274 option without changing the local value.
|
|
|
275 When displaying an option, the global value is shown.
|
|
|
276 With the "all" argument: display all local option's
|
|
|
277 global values.
|
|
|
278 Without argument: display all local option's global
|
|
|
279 values which are different from the default.
|
|
|
280 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
281
|
|
|
282 For buffer-local and window-local options:
|
|
|
283 Command global value local value ~
|
|
|
284 :set option=value set set
|
|
|
285 :setlocal option=value - set
|
|
|
286 :setglobal option=value set -
|
|
|
287 :set option? - display
|
|
|
288 :setlocal option? - display
|
|
|
289 :setglobal option? display -
|
|
|
290
|
|
|
291
|
|
|
292 Global options with a local value *global-local*
|
|
|
293
|
|
|
294 Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers. For some
|
|
|
295 global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value. You can
|
|
|
296 set the local value with ":setlocal". That buffer will then use the local
|
|
|
297 value, while other buffers continue using the global value.
|
|
|
298
|
|
|
299 For example, you have two windows, both on C source code. They use the global
|
|
|
300 'makeprg' option. If you do this in one of the two windows: >
|
|
|
301 :set makeprg=gmake
|
|
|
302 then the other window will switch to the same value. There is no need to set
|
|
|
303 the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too.
|
|
|
304 However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use
|
|
|
305 another 'makeprog' for it, without changing the value used for the C source
|
|
10
|
306 files. You use this command: >
|
|
7
|
307 :setlocal makeprg=perlmake
|
|
|
308 You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty: >
|
|
|
309 :setlocal makeprg=
|
|
|
310 This only works for a string option. For a boolean option you need to use the
|
|
|
311 "<" flag, like this: >
|
|
|
312 :setlocal autoread<
|
|
|
313 Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the
|
|
|
314 local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters
|
|
|
315 when changing the global value later).
|
|
|
316 Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local. Using
|
|
|
317 ":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then.
|
|
|
318
|
|
|
319
|
|
|
320 Setting the filetype
|
|
|
321
|
|
|
322 :setf[iletype] {filetype} *:setf* *:setfiletype*
|
|
|
323 Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if
|
|
|
324 not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands.
|
|
|
325 This is short for: >
|
|
|
326 :if !did_filetype()
|
|
|
327 : setlocal filetype={filetype}
|
|
|
328 :endif
|
|
|
329 < This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid
|
|
|
330 setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different
|
|
|
331 settings and syntax files to be loaded.
|
|
|
332 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
333
|
|
|
334 :bro[wse] se[t] *:set-browse* *:browse-set* *:opt* *:options*
|
|
|
335 :opt[ions] Open a window for viewing and setting all options.
|
|
|
336 Options are grouped by function.
|
|
|
337 Offers short help for each option. Hit <CR> on the
|
|
|
338 short help to open a help window with more help for
|
|
|
339 the option.
|
|
|
340 Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the
|
|
|
341 "set" line to set the new value. For window and
|
|
|
342 buffer specific options, the last accessed window is
|
|
|
343 used to set the option value in, unless this is a help
|
|
|
344 window, in which case the window below help window is
|
|
|
345 used (skipping the option-window).
|
|
|
346 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| or
|
|
|
347 |+autocmd| features}
|
|
|
348
|
|
|
349 *$HOME*
|
|
|
350 Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an
|
|
|
351 option and after a space or comma.
|
|
|
352
|
|
|
353 On Unix systems "~user" can be used too. It is replaced by the home directory
|
|
|
354 of user "user". Example: >
|
|
|
355 :set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,.
|
|
|
356
|
|
|
357 On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too. The name between {} can
|
|
|
358 contain non-id characters then. Note that if you want to use this for the
|
|
|
359 "gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'.
|
|
|
360
|
|
|
361 NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set"
|
|
|
362 command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let".
|
|
|
363
|
|
|
364
|
|
|
365 Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited. How much depends on
|
|
|
366 the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
|
|
|
367
|
|
|
368 *:fix* *:fixdel*
|
|
|
369 :fix[del] Set the value of 't_kD':
|
|
|
370 't_kb' is 't_kD' becomes ~
|
|
|
371 CTRL-? CTRL-H
|
|
|
372 not CTRL-? CTRL-?
|
|
|
373
|
|
|
374 (CTRL-? is 0177 octal, 0x7f hex) {not in Vi}
|
|
|
375
|
|
|
376 If your delete key terminal code is wrong, but the
|
|
|
377 code for backspace is alright, you can put this in
|
|
|
378 your .vimrc: >
|
|
|
379 :fixdel
|
|
|
380 < This works no matter what the actual code for
|
|
|
381 backspace is.
|
|
|
382
|
|
|
383 If the backspace key terminal code is wrong you can
|
|
|
384 use this: >
|
|
|
385 :if &term == "termname"
|
|
|
386 : set t_kb=^V<BS>
|
|
|
387 : fixdel
|
|
|
388 :endif
|
|
|
389 < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<BS>" is the backspace key
|
|
10
|
390 (don't type four characters!). Replace "termname"
|
|
7
|
391 with your terminal name.
|
|
|
392
|
|
|
393 If your <Delete> key sends a strange key sequence (not
|
|
|
394 CTRL-? or CTRL-H) you cannot use ":fixdel". Then use: >
|
|
|
395 :if &term == "termname"
|
|
|
396 : set t_kD=^V<Delete>
|
|
|
397 :endif
|
|
|
398 < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<Delete>" is the delete key
|
|
|
399 (don't type eight characters!). Replace "termname"
|
|
|
400 with your terminal name.
|
|
|
401
|
|
|
402 *Linux-backspace*
|
|
|
403 Note about Linux: By default the backspace key
|
|
|
404 produces CTRL-?, which is wrong. You can fix it by
|
|
|
405 putting this line in your rc.local: >
|
|
|
406 echo "keycode 14 = BackSpace" | loadkeys
|
|
|
407 <
|
|
|
408 *NetBSD-backspace*
|
|
|
409 Note about NetBSD: If your backspace doesn't produce
|
|
|
410 the right code, try this: >
|
|
|
411 xmodmap -e "keycode 22 = BackSpace"
|
|
|
412 < If this works, add this in your .Xmodmap file: >
|
|
|
413 keysym 22 = BackSpace
|
|
|
414 < You need to restart for this to take effect.
|
|
|
415
|
|
|
416 ==============================================================================
|
|
|
417 2. Automatically setting options *auto-setting*
|
|
|
418
|
|
|
419 Besides changing options with the ":set" command, there are three alternatives
|
|
|
420 to set options automatically for one or more files:
|
|
|
421
|
|
|
422 1. When starting Vim initializations are read from various places. See
|
|
|
423 |initialization|. Most of them are performed for all editing sessions,
|
|
|
424 and some of them depend on the directory where Vim is started.
|
|
|
425 You can create an initialization file with |:mkvimrc|, |:mkview| and
|
|
|
426 |:mksession|.
|
|
|
427 2. If you start editing a new file, the automatic commands are executed.
|
|
|
428 This can be used to set options for files matching a particular pattern and
|
|
|
429 many other things. See |autocommand|.
|
|
|
430 3. If you start editing a new file, and the 'modeline' option is on, a
|
|
|
431 number of lines at the beginning and end of the file are checked for
|
|
|
432 modelines. This is explained here.
|
|
|
433
|
|
|
434 *modeline* *vim:* *vi:* *ex:* *E520*
|
|
|
435 There are two forms of modelines. The first form:
|
|
|
436 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options}
|
|
|
437
|
|
|
438 [text] any text or empty
|
|
|
439 {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
|
|
|
440 {vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
|
|
|
441 [white] optional white space
|
|
|
442 {options} a list of option settings, separated with white space or ':',
|
|
|
443 where each part between ':' is the argument for a ":set"
|
|
|
444 command
|
|
|
445
|
|
|
446 Example: >
|
|
|
447 vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6
|
|
|
448
|
|
|
449 The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi):
|
|
|
450
|
|
|
451 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text]
|
|
|
452
|
|
|
453 [text] any text or empty
|
|
|
454 {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
|
|
|
455 {vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
|
|
|
456 [white] optional white space
|
|
|
457 se[t] the string "set " or "se " (note the space)
|
|
|
458 {options} a list of options, separated with white space, which is the
|
|
|
459 argument for a ":set" command
|
|
|
460 : a colon
|
|
|
461 [text] any text or empty
|
|
|
462
|
|
|
463 Example: >
|
|
|
464 /* vim: set ai tw=75: */
|
|
|
465
|
|
|
466 The white space before {vi:|vim:|ex:} is required. This minimizes the chance
|
|
|
467 that a normal word like "lex:" is caught. There is one exception: "vi:" and
|
|
|
468 "vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with version
|
|
|
469 3.0). Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this could be
|
|
|
470 short for "example:").
|
|
|
471
|
|
|
472 *modeline-local*
|
|
|
473 The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the
|
|
11
|
474 buffer and window that contain the file. Although it's possible to set global
|
|
|
475 options from a modeline, this is unusual. If you have two windows open and
|
|
|
476 the files in it set the same global option to a different value, the result
|
|
|
477 depends on which one was opened last.
|
|
7
|
478
|
|
23
|
479 When editing a file that was already loaded, only the window-local options
|
|
|
480 from the modeline are used. Thus if you manually changed a buffer-local
|
|
|
481 option after opening the file, it won't be changed if you edit the same buffer
|
|
|
482 in another window. But window-local options will be set.
|
|
|
483
|
|
7
|
484 *modeline-version*
|
|
|
485 If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version
|
|
|
486 number can be specified where "vim:" is used:
|
|
|
487 vim{vers}: version {vers} or later
|
|
|
488 vim<{vers}: version before {vers}
|
|
|
489 vim={vers}: version {vers}
|
|
|
490 vim>{vers}: version after {vers}
|
|
|
491 {vers} is 600 for Vim 6.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor).
|
|
|
492 For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 6.0 and later: >
|
|
|
493 /* vim600: set foldmethod=marker: */
|
|
|
494 To use a modeline for Vim before version 5.7: >
|
|
|
495 /* vim<570: set sw=4: */
|
|
|
496 There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":".
|
|
|
497
|
|
|
498
|
|
|
499 The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option.
|
|
|
500 If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked.
|
|
|
501
|
|
|
502 Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line
|
|
|
503 like: >
|
|
|
504 /* vi:ts=4: */
|
|
|
505 will give an error message for the trailing "*/". This line is OK: >
|
|
|
506 /* vi:set ts=4: */
|
|
|
507
|
|
|
508 If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped.
|
|
|
509
|
|
|
510 If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'. The
|
|
10
|
511 backslash in front of the ':' will be removed. Example: >
|
|
7
|
512 /* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */
|
|
|
513 This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp". Only a single backslash before the
|
|
|
514 ':' is removed. Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:".
|
|
|
515
|
|
|
516 No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody
|
|
|
517 might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines).
|
|
|
518
|
|
|
519 Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could
|
|
|
520 define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string. For
|
|
|
521 example: >
|
|
|
522 au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif
|
|
|
523 And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing
|
|
|
524 "VAR".
|
|
|
525
|
|
|
526 ==============================================================================
|
|
|
527 3. Options summary *option-summary*
|
|
|
528
|
|
|
529 In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with
|
|
|
530 an abbreviation if there is one. Both forms may be used.
|
|
|
531
|
|
|
532 In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option"
|
|
|
533 is entered. When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used.
|
|
|
534
|
|
|
535 For some options there are two default values: The "Vim default", which is
|
|
|
536 used when 'compatible' is not set, and the "Vi default", which is used when
|
|
|
537 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
538
|
|
|
539 Most options are the same in all windows and buffers. There are a few that
|
|
10
|
540 are specific to how the text is presented in a window. These can be set to a
|
|
7
|
541 different value in each window. For example the 'list' option can be set in
|
|
|
542 one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view
|
|
|
543 at the same time. There are a few options that are specific to a certain
|
|
|
544 file. These can have a different value for each file or buffer. For example
|
|
|
545 the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C
|
|
|
546 program.
|
|
|
547
|
|
|
548 global one option for all buffers and windows
|
|
|
549 local to window each window has its own copy of this option
|
|
|
550 local to buffer each buffer has its own copy of this option
|
|
|
551
|
|
|
552 When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window
|
|
|
553 are used as a default value for the window-specific options. For the
|
|
|
554 buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the
|
|
|
555 'cpoptions' option. If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for
|
|
|
556 buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is
|
|
10
|
557 first entered. If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer
|
|
|
558 is entered, this is almost like having global options. If 's' and 'S' are not
|
|
7
|
559 present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the
|
|
|
560 buffer is created.
|
|
|
561
|
|
10
|
562 Not all options are supported in all versions. To test if option "foo" can be
|
|
|
563 used with ":set" use "exists('&foo')". This doesn't mean the value is
|
|
|
564 actually remembered and works. Some options are hidden, which means that you
|
|
7
|
565 can set them but the value is not remembered. To test if option "foo" is
|
|
|
566 really supported use "exists('+foo')".
|
|
|
567
|
|
|
568 *E355*
|
|
|
569 A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
|
|
|
570
|
|
|
571 *'aleph'* *'al'* *aleph* *Aleph*
|
|
|
572 'aleph' 'al' number (default 128 for MS-DOS, 224 otherwise)
|
|
|
573 global
|
|
|
574 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
575 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
|
576 feature}
|
|
|
577 The ASCII code for the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet. The
|
|
|
578 routine that maps the keyboard in Hebrew mode, both in Insert mode
|
|
|
579 (when hkmap is set) and on the command-line (when hitting CTRL-_)
|
|
|
580 outputs the Hebrew characters in the range [aleph..aleph+26].
|
|
|
581 aleph=128 applies to PC code, and aleph=224 applies to ISO 8859-8.
|
|
|
582 See |rileft.txt|.
|
|
|
583
|
|
|
584 *'allowrevins'* *'ari'* *'noallowrevins'* *'noari'*
|
|
|
585 'allowrevins' 'ari' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
586 global
|
|
|
587 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
588 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
|
589 feature}
|
|
|
590 Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode. This is default off, to
|
|
|
591 avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get
|
|
|
592 into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out. See
|
|
|
593 'revins'.
|
|
|
594 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
595
|
|
|
596 *'altkeymap'* *'akm'* *'noaltkeymap'* *'noakm'*
|
|
|
597 'altkeymap' 'akm' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
598 global
|
|
|
599 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
600 {only available when compiled with the |+farsi|
|
|
|
601 feature}
|
|
|
602 When on, the second language is Farsi. In editing mode CTRL-_ toggles
|
|
|
603 the keyboard map between Farsi and English, when 'allowrevins' set.
|
|
|
604
|
|
|
605 When off, the keyboard map toggles between Hebrew and English. This
|
|
|
606 is useful to start the Vim in native mode i.e. English (left-to-right
|
|
|
607 mode) and have default second language Farsi or Hebrew (right-to-left
|
|
10
|
608 mode). See |farsi.txt|.
|
|
7
|
609
|
|
|
610 *'ambiwidth'* *'ambw'*
|
|
|
611 'ambiwidth' 'ambw' string (default: "single")
|
|
|
612 global
|
|
|
613 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
614 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
|
615 feature}
|
|
|
616 Only effective when 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding.
|
|
|
617 Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class
|
|
|
618 Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek
|
|
|
619 letters, Cyrillic letters).
|
|
|
620
|
|
|
621 There are currently two possible values:
|
|
|
622 "single": Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII. This is
|
|
|
623 expected by most users.
|
|
|
624 "double": Use twice the width of ASCII characters.
|
|
|
625
|
|
|
626 There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for
|
|
|
627 those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in
|
|
|
628 legacy/traditional CJK encodings. In those encodings, Euro,
|
|
|
629 Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets,
|
|
|
630 therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them. This is also
|
|
|
631 true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text
|
|
|
632 file. Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or
|
|
|
633 Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font
|
|
|
634 (or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.),
|
|
|
635 this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived
|
|
|
636 by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font. Perhaps it also has
|
|
|
637 to be set to "double" under CJK Windows 9x/ME or Windows 2k/XP
|
|
|
638 when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales. See Unicode
|
|
|
639 Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11).
|
|
|
640
|
|
|
641 *'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'*
|
|
|
642 'antialias' 'anti' boolean (default: off)
|
|
|
643 global
|
|
|
644 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
645 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled
|
|
|
646 on Mac OS X}
|
|
|
647 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim on Mac OS X
|
|
|
648 v10.2 or later. When on, Vim will use smooth ("antialiased") fonts,
|
|
|
649 which can be easier to read at certain sizes on certain displays.
|
|
|
650 Setting this option can sometimes cause problems if 'guifont' is set
|
|
|
651 to its default (empty string).
|
|
|
652
|
|
|
653 *'autochdir'* *'acd'* *'noautochdir'* *'noacd'*
|
|
|
654 'autochdir' 'acd' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
655 global
|
|
|
656 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
657 {only available when compiled with the
|
|
|
658 |+netbeans_intg| or |+sun_workshop| feature}
|
|
|
659 When on, Vim will change its value for the current working directory
|
|
|
660 whenever you open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or
|
|
|
661 open/close a window. It will change to the directory containing the
|
|
|
662 file which was opened or selected. This option is provided for
|
|
|
663 backward compatibility with the Vim released with Sun ONE Studio 4
|
|
|
664 Enterprise Edition.
|
|
|
665
|
|
|
666 *'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'*
|
|
|
667 'arabic' 'arab' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
668 local to window
|
|
|
669 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
670 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
|
|
|
671 feature}
|
|
|
672 This option can be set to start editing Arabic text.
|
|
|
673 Setting this option will:
|
|
|
674 - Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
|
|
|
675 - Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
|
|
|
676 - Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles
|
|
|
677 between typing English and Arabic key mapping.
|
|
|
678 - Set the 'delcombine' option
|
|
|
679 Note that 'encoding' must be "utf-8" for working with Arabic text.
|
|
|
680
|
|
|
681 Resetting this option will:
|
|
|
682 - Reset the 'rightleft' option.
|
|
|
683 - Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
|
|
|
684 Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
|
|
|
685 option.
|
|
|
686 Also see |arabic.txt|.
|
|
|
687
|
|
|
688 *'arabicshape'* *'arshape'*
|
|
|
689 *'noarabicshape'* *'noarshape'*
|
|
|
690 'arabicshape' 'arshape' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
691 global
|
|
|
692 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
693 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
|
|
|
694 feature}
|
|
|
695 When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
|
|
|
696 corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
|
|
|
697 take affect. Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
|
|
|
698 one which encompasses:
|
|
|
699 a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
|
|
|
700 within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
|
|
|
701 b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters
|
|
|
702 c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters
|
|
|
703 When disabled the character display reverts back to each character's
|
|
|
704 true stand-alone form.
|
|
|
705 Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for
|
|
|
706 further details see |arabic.txt|.
|
|
|
707
|
|
|
708 *'autoindent'* *'ai'* *'noautoindent'* *'noai'*
|
|
|
709 'autoindent' 'ai' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
710 local to buffer
|
|
|
711 Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR>
|
|
|
712 in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command). If you do not
|
|
|
713 type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type
|
|
10
|
714 <Esc> or <CR>, the indent is deleted again. Moving the cursor to
|
|
|
715 another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included in
|
|
|
716 'cpoptions'.
|
|
|
717 When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you
|
|
|
718 reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first
|
|
|
719 line.
|
|
7
|
720 When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in
|
|
|
721 a different way.
|
|
|
722 The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
|
|
|
723 {small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing
|
|
|
724 <Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the
|
|
|
725 deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}.
|
|
|
726
|
|
|
727 *'autoread'* *'ar'* *'noautoread'* *'noar'*
|
|
|
728 'autoread' 'ar' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
729 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
|
730 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
731 When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and
|
|
|
732 it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again.
|
|
|
733 When the file has been deleted this is not done. |timestamp|
|
|
|
734 If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to
|
|
|
735 using the global value: >
|
|
|
736 :set autoread<
|
|
|
737 <
|
|
|
738 *'autowrite'* *'aw'* *'noautowrite'* *'noaw'*
|
|
|
739 'autowrite' 'aw' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
740 global
|
|
|
741 Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each
|
|
|
742 :next, :rewind, :last, :first, :previous, :stop, :suspend, :tag, :!,
|
|
|
743 :make, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when a CTRL-O, CTRL-I,
|
|
|
744 '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one to another file.
|
|
|
745 Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see
|
|
|
746 'autowriteall' for that.
|
|
|
747
|
|
|
748 *'autowriteall'* *'awa'* *'noautowriteall'* *'noawa'*
|
|
|
749 'autowriteall' 'awa' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
750 global
|
|
|
751 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
752 Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew", ":quit",
|
|
|
753 ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window.
|
|
|
754 Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has
|
|
|
755 been set.
|
|
|
756
|
|
|
757 *'background'* *'bg'*
|
|
|
758 'background' 'bg' string (default "dark" or "light")
|
|
|
759 global
|
|
|
760 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
761 When set to "dark", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a
|
|
|
762 dark background. When set to "light", Vim will try to use colors that
|
|
|
763 look good on a light background. Any other value is illegal.
|
|
|
764 Vim tries to set the default value according to the terminal used.
|
|
|
765 This will not always be correct.
|
|
|
766 Setting this option does not change the background color, it tells Vim
|
|
|
767 what the background color looks like. For changing the background
|
|
|
768 color, see |:hi-normal|.
|
|
|
769
|
|
|
770 When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for
|
|
10
|
771 the new value. But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not
|
|
7
|
772 change.
|
|
|
773 When a color scheme is loaded (the "colors_name" variable is set)
|
|
|
774 setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded. If
|
|
|
775 the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work.
|
|
|
776 However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may
|
|
|
777 be undone. First delete the "colors_name" variable when needed.
|
|
|
778
|
|
|
779 When setting 'background' to the default value with: >
|
|
|
780 :set background&
|
|
|
781 < Vim will guess the value. In the GUI this should work correctly,
|
|
|
782 in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value.
|
|
|
783
|
|
|
784 When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be
|
|
|
785 "light". When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects
|
|
|
786 that the background is actually quite dark, 'background' is set to
|
|
|
787 "dark". But this happens only AFTER the .gvimrc file has been read
|
|
|
788 (because the window needs to be opened to find the actual background
|
|
|
789 color). To get around this, force the GUI window to be opened by
|
|
|
790 putting a ":gui" command in the .gvimrc file, before where the value
|
|
|
791 of 'background' is used (e.g., before ":syntax on").
|
|
|
792 Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file. Possibly
|
|
|
793 depending on the terminal name. Example: >
|
|
|
794 :if &term == "pcterm"
|
|
|
795 : set background=dark
|
|
|
796 :endif
|
|
|
797 < When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups
|
|
|
798 will change. To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER
|
|
|
799 the setting of the 'background' option.
|
|
|
800 This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file
|
|
|
801 to select the colors for syntax highlighting. After changing this
|
|
|
802 option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result. This can be
|
|
|
803 done with ":syntax on".
|
|
|
804
|
|
|
805 *'backspace'* *'bs'*
|
|
|
806 'backspace' 'bs' string (default "")
|
|
|
807 global
|
|
|
808 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
809 Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert
|
|
|
810 mode. This is a list of items, separated by commas. Each item allows
|
|
|
811 a way to backspace over something:
|
|
|
812 value effect ~
|
|
|
813 indent allow backspacing over autoindent
|
|
|
814 eol allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines)
|
|
|
815 start allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U
|
|
|
816 stop once at the start of insert.
|
|
|
817
|
|
|
818 When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used.
|
|
|
819
|
|
|
820 For backwards compatibility with version 5.4 and earlier:
|
|
|
821 value effect ~
|
|
|
822 0 same as ":set backspace=" (Vi compatible)
|
|
|
823 1 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol"
|
|
|
824 2 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol,start"
|
|
|
825
|
|
|
826 See |:fixdel| if your <BS> or <Del> key does not do what you want.
|
|
|
827 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
828
|
|
|
829 *'backup'* *'bk'* *'nobackup'* *'nobk'*
|
|
|
830 'backup' 'bk' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
831 global
|
|
|
832 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
833 Make a backup before overwriting a file. Leave it around after the
|
|
|
834 file has been successfully written. If you do not want to keep the
|
|
|
835 backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being
|
|
|
836 written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is
|
|
|
837 the default). If you do not want a backup file at all reset both
|
|
10
|
838 options (use this if your file system is almost full). See the
|
|
7
|
839 |backup-table| for more explanations.
|
|
|
840 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
|
|
|
841 When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the
|
|
|
842 oldest version of a file.
|
|
|
843 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
844
|
|
|
845 *'backupcopy'* *'bkc'*
|
|
|
846 'backupcopy' 'bkc' string (Vi default for Unix: "yes", otherwise: "auto")
|
|
|
847 global
|
|
|
848 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
849 When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's
|
|
|
850 done. This is a comma separated list of words.
|
|
|
851
|
|
|
852 The main values are:
|
|
|
853 "yes" make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one
|
|
|
854 "no" rename the file and write a new one
|
|
|
855 "auto" one of the previous, what works best
|
|
|
856
|
|
|
857 Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are:
|
|
|
858 "breaksymlink" always break symlinks when writing
|
|
|
859 "breakhardlink" always break hardlinks when writing
|
|
|
860
|
|
|
861 Making a copy and overwriting the original file:
|
|
|
862 - Takes extra time to copy the file.
|
|
|
863 + When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or
|
|
|
864 has a resource fork, all this is preserved.
|
|
|
865 - When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link,
|
|
|
866 not of the real file.
|
|
|
867
|
|
|
868 Renaming the file and writing a new one:
|
|
|
869 + It's fast.
|
|
|
870 - Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new
|
|
|
871 file.
|
|
|
872 - When the file is a link the new file will not be a link.
|
|
|
873
|
|
|
874 The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming file
|
|
|
875 is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on and
|
|
|
876 and the file is not a link) that is used. When problems are expected,
|
|
|
877 a copy will be made.
|
|
|
878
|
|
|
879 The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in
|
|
|
880 combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto". When included, they
|
|
|
881 force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing
|
|
|
882 exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to
|
|
|
883 become the backup and writing a new file in its place. This can be
|
|
|
884 useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or
|
|
|
885 hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not
|
|
|
886 be propagated back to the original source.
|
|
|
887 *crontab*
|
|
|
888 One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program
|
|
|
889 that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if
|
|
|
890 the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the
|
|
10
|
891 backup file instead of the newly created file. "crontab -e" is an
|
|
7
|
892 example.
|
|
|
893
|
|
|
894 When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled
|
|
|
895 with the new text. This means that protection bits, owner and
|
|
|
896 symbolic links of the original file are unmodified. The backup file
|
|
10
|
897 however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file. The
|
|
7
|
898 group of the backup is set to the group of the original file. If this
|
|
|
899 fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for
|
|
|
900 others.
|
|
|
901
|
|
|
902 When the file is renamed this is the other way around: The backup has
|
|
|
903 the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file
|
|
|
904 is owned by the current user. When the file was a (hard/symbolic)
|
|
|
905 link, the new file will not! That's why the "auto" value doesn't
|
|
|
906 rename when the file is a link. The owner and group of the newly
|
|
|
907 written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but
|
|
|
908 the system may refuse to do this. In that case the "auto" value will
|
|
|
909 again not rename the file.
|
|
|
910
|
|
|
911 *'backupdir'* *'bdir'*
|
|
|
912 'backupdir' 'bdir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:",
|
|
|
913 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:/tmp,c:/temp"
|
|
|
914 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,~/")
|
|
|
915 global
|
|
|
916 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
917 List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas.
|
|
|
918 - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
|
|
|
919 where this is possible.
|
|
|
920 - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
|
|
|
921 impossible!). Writing may fail because of this.
|
|
|
922 - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
|
|
|
923 as the edited file.
|
|
33
|
924 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to
|
|
7
|
925 put the backup file relative to where the edited file is. The
|
|
|
926 leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
|
|
|
927 ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning).
|
|
|
928 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
|
|
|
929 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory
|
|
|
930 name, precede it with a backslash.
|
|
|
931 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
|
|
|
932 - A directory name may end in an '/'.
|
|
|
933 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
|
934 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
|
|
|
935 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
|
|
|
936 :set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
|
|
|
937 < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
|
|
|
938 of the option is removed.
|
|
|
939 See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options.
|
|
|
940 If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: >
|
|
|
941 :set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp
|
|
|
942 < You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your
|
|
|
943 home directory for this to work properly.
|
|
|
944 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
|
945 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
|
946 uses another default.
|
|
|
947 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
948 security reasons.
|
|
|
949
|
|
|
950 *'backupext'* *'bex'* *E589*
|
|
|
951 'backupext' 'bex' string (default "~", for VMS: "_")
|
|
|
952 global
|
|
|
953 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
954 String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the
|
|
|
955 backup file. The default is quite unusual, because this avoids
|
|
|
956 accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file. You might
|
|
|
957 prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with
|
|
|
958 ".bak" that you want to keep.
|
|
36
|
959 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
|
|
7
|
960
|
|
26
|
961 If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre
|
|
|
962 autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to
|
|
|
963 include a timestamp. >
|
|
|
964 :au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' . strftime("%Y%b%d%X") . '~'
|
|
|
965 < Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory.
|
|
|
966
|
|
7
|
967 *'backupskip'* *'bsk'*
|
|
|
968 'backupskip' 'bsk' string (default: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*")
|
|
|
969 global
|
|
|
970 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
971 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
|
|
|
972 feature}
|
|
|
973 A list of file patterns. When one of the patterns matches with the
|
|
|
974 name of the file which is written, no backup file is created. Both
|
|
|
975 the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used.
|
|
|
976 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
|
|
|
977 Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|.
|
|
|
978 When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
|
|
|
979 default value. "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.
|
|
|
980
|
|
|
981 *'balloondelay'* *'bdlay'*
|
|
|
982 'balloondelay' 'bdlay' number (default: 600)
|
|
|
983 global
|
|
|
984 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
985 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
|
|
|
986 feature}
|
|
|
987 Delay in milliseconds before a balloon may pop up. See |balloon-eval|.
|
|
|
988
|
|
|
989 *'ballooneval'* *'beval'* *'noballooneval'* *'nobeval'*
|
|
|
990 'ballooneval' 'beval' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
991 global
|
|
|
992 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
993 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
|
|
|
994 and |+sun_workshop| or |+netbeans_intg| features}
|
|
|
995 Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality.
|
|
|
996
|
|
|
997 *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'*
|
|
|
998 'binary' 'bin' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
999 local to buffer
|
|
|
1000 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1001 This option should be set before editing a binary file. You can also
|
|
|
1002 use the |-b| Vim argument. When this option is switched on a few
|
|
|
1003 options will be changed (also when it already was on):
|
|
|
1004 'textwidth' will be set to 0
|
|
|
1005 'wrapmargin' will be set to 0
|
|
|
1006 'modeline' will be off
|
|
|
1007 'expandtab' will be off
|
|
|
1008 Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the
|
|
|
1009 file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL>
|
|
|
1010 separates lines).
|
|
|
1011 The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the
|
|
|
1012 file is read without conversion.
|
|
|
1013 NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is
|
|
|
1014 on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g.,
|
|
|
1015 'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing. You might want to set
|
|
|
1016 'bin' again when the file has been loaded.
|
|
|
1017 The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when
|
|
|
1018 'bin' is switched from on to off. Each buffer has its own set of
|
|
|
1019 saved option values.
|
|
|
1020 To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument.
|
|
|
1021 This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all
|
|
|
1022 files you edit.
|
|
|
1023 When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if
|
|
|
1024 there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to
|
|
|
1025 the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer). See
|
|
|
1026 the 'endofline' option.
|
|
|
1027
|
|
|
1028 *'bioskey'* *'biosk'* *'nobioskey'* *'nobiosk'*
|
|
|
1029 'bioskey' 'biosk' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
1030 global
|
|
|
1031 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS}
|
|
|
1032 When on the bios is called to obtain a keyboard character. This works
|
|
|
1033 better to detect CTRL-C, but only works for the console. When using a
|
|
|
1034 terminal over a serial port reset this option.
|
|
|
1035 Also see |'conskey'|.
|
|
|
1036
|
|
|
1037 *'bomb'* *'nobomb'*
|
|
|
1038 'bomb' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
1039 local to buffer
|
|
|
1040 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1041 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
|
1042 feature}
|
|
|
1043 When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte
|
|
|
1044 Order Mark) is prepended to the file:
|
|
|
1045 - this option is on
|
|
|
1046 - the 'binary' option is off
|
|
|
1047 - 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big
|
|
|
1048 endian variants.
|
|
|
1049 Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file.
|
|
|
1050 Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows. For other applications it
|
|
|
1051 causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2
|
|
|
1052 appear halfway the resulting file.
|
|
|
1053 When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a
|
|
|
1054 check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly.
|
|
|
1055 Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you
|
|
|
1056 don't see it when editing. When you don't change the options, the BOM
|
|
|
1057 will be restored when writing the file.
|
|
|
1058
|
|
|
1059 *'breakat'* *'brk'*
|
|
|
1060 'breakat' 'brk' string (default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?")
|
|
|
1061 global
|
|
|
1062 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1063 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
|
|
|
1064 feature}
|
|
|
1065 This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line
|
|
|
1066 break if 'linebreak' is on.
|
|
|
1067
|
|
|
1068 *'browsedir'* *'bsdir'*
|
|
29
|
1069 'browsedir' 'bsdir' string (default: "last")
|
|
7
|
1070 global
|
|
|
1071 {not in Vi} {only for Motif and Win32 GUI}
|
|
|
1072 Which directory to use for the file browser:
|
|
|
1073 last Use same directory as with last file browser.
|
|
|
1074 buffer Use the directory of the related buffer.
|
|
|
1075 current Use the current directory.
|
|
|
1076 {path} Use the specified directory
|
|
|
1077
|
|
|
1078 *'bufhidden'* *'bh'*
|
|
|
1079 'bufhidden' 'bh' string (default: "")
|
|
|
1080 local to buffer
|
|
|
1081 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1082 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
|
|
1083 feature}
|
|
|
1084 This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer
|
|
|
1085 displayed in a window:
|
|
|
1086 <empty> follow the global 'hidden' option
|
|
|
1087 hide hide the buffer (don't unload it), also when 'hidden'
|
|
|
1088 is not set
|
|
|
1089 unload unload the buffer, also when 'hidden' is set or using
|
|
|
1090 |:hide|
|
|
|
1091 delete delete the buffer from the buffer list, also when
|
|
|
1092 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
|
|
|
1093 |:bdelete|
|
|
|
1094 wipe wipe out the buffer from the buffer list, also when
|
|
|
1095 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
|
|
|
1096 |:bwipeout|
|
|
|
1097
|
|
|
1098 This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
|
|
|
1099 special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
|
|
|
1100
|
|
|
1101 *'buflisted'* *'bl'* *'nobuflisted'* *'nobl'* *E85*
|
|
|
1102 'buflisted' 'bl' boolean (default: on)
|
|
|
1103 local to buffer
|
|
|
1104 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1105 When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list. If
|
|
|
1106 it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc.
|
|
|
1107 This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember
|
|
|
1108 a file name or marks. Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer.
|
|
|
1109 But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer".
|
|
|
1110
|
|
|
1111 *'buftype'* *'bt'* *E382*
|
|
|
1112 'buftype' 'bt' string (default: "")
|
|
|
1113 local to buffer
|
|
|
1114 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1115 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
|
|
1116 feature}
|
|
|
1117 The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:
|
|
|
1118 <empty> normal buffer
|
|
|
1119 nofile buffer which is not related to a file and will not be
|
|
|
1120 written
|
|
|
1121 nowrite buffer which will not be written
|
|
17
|
1122 acwrite buffer which will always be written with BufWriteCmd
|
|
|
1123 autocommands. {not available when compiled without the
|
|
|
1124 |+autocmd| feature}
|
|
7
|
1125 quickfix quickfix buffer, contains list of errors |:cwindow|
|
|
|
1126 help help buffer (you are not supposed to set this
|
|
|
1127 manually)
|
|
|
1128
|
|
|
1129 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to
|
|
|
1130 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
|
|
|
1131
|
|
|
1132 Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects!
|
|
|
1133
|
|
|
1134 A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list. This value is
|
|
|
1135 set by the |:cwindow| command and you are not supposed to change it.
|
|
|
1136
|
|
|
1137 "nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar:
|
|
|
1138 both: The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't
|
|
|
1139 work (":w filename" does work though).
|
|
|
1140 both: The buffer is never considered to be |'modified'|.
|
|
|
1141 There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for
|
|
|
1142 example when you quit Vim.
|
|
|
1143 both: A swap file is only created when using too much memory
|
|
|
1144 (when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap
|
|
|
1145 file).
|
|
|
1146 nofile only: The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a
|
|
|
1147 file name. It is not modified in response to a |:cd|
|
|
|
1148 command.
|
|
17
|
1149 *E676*
|
|
|
1150 "acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like
|
|
|
1151 "nofile", but it will be written. Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and
|
|
|
1152 "nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned
|
|
|
1153 without saving. For writing there must be matching |BufWriteCmd|,
|
|
|
1154 |FileWriteCmd| or |FileAppendCmd| autocommands.
|
|
7
|
1155
|
|
|
1156 *'casemap'* *'cmp'*
|
|
|
1157 'casemap' 'cmp' string (default: "internal,keepascii")
|
|
|
1158 global
|
|
|
1159 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1160 Specifies details about changing the case of letters. It may contain
|
|
|
1161 these words, separated by a comma:
|
|
|
1162 internal Use internal case mapping functions, the current
|
|
|
1163 locale does not change the case mapping. This only
|
|
10
|
1164 matters when 'encoding' is a Unicode encoding. When
|
|
7
|
1165 "internal" is omitted, the towupper() and towlower()
|
|
|
1166 system library functions are used when available.
|
|
|
1167 keepascii For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US
|
|
|
1168 case mapping, the current locale is not effective.
|
|
|
1169 This probably only matters for Turkish.
|
|
|
1170
|
|
|
1171 *'cdpath'* *'cd'* *E344* *E346*
|
|
|
1172 'cdpath' 'cd' string (default: equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,")
|
|
|
1173 global
|
|
|
1174 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1175 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
|
1176 |+file_in_path| feature}
|
|
|
1177 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
|
|
|
1178 |:cd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being searched
|
|
|
1179 for has a relative path (not starting with "/", "./" or "../").
|
|
|
1180 The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as
|
|
|
1181 |'path'|. Also see |file-searching|.
|
|
|
1182 The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look
|
|
|
1183 in the current directory first.
|
|
|
1184 If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include
|
|
|
1185 a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to
|
|
|
1186 override it: >
|
|
|
1187 :let &cdpath = ',' . substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g')
|
|
|
1188 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
1189 security reasons.
|
|
|
1190 (parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names).
|
|
|
1191
|
|
|
1192 *'cedit'*
|
|
|
1193 'cedit' string (Vi default: "", Vim default: CTRL-F)
|
|
|
1194 global
|
|
|
1195 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1196 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
|
|
|
1197 feature}
|
|
|
1198 The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window.
|
|
|
1199 The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is off.
|
|
|
1200 Only non-printable keys are allowed.
|
|
|
1201 The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to
|
|
|
1202 type. The preferred way is to use the <> notation. Examples: >
|
|
|
1203 :set cedit=<C-Y>
|
|
|
1204 :set cedit=<Esc>
|
|
|
1205 < |Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character.
|
|
|
1206 See |cmdwin|.
|
|
|
1207
|
|
|
1208 *'charconvert'* *'ccv'* *E202* *E214* *E513*
|
|
|
1209 'charconvert' 'ccv' string (default "")
|
|
|
1210 global
|
|
|
1211 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
|
1212 feature and the |+eval| feature}
|
|
|
1213 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1214 An expression that is used for character encoding conversion. It is
|
|
|
1215 evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a
|
|
|
1216 different encoding from what is desired.
|
|
|
1217 'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is
|
|
|
1218 supported and is able to do the conversion. Using iconv() is
|
|
|
1219 preferred, because it is much faster.
|
|
|
1220 'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no
|
|
|
1221 file to convert from. You will have to save the text in a file first.
|
|
|
1222 The expression must return zero or an empty string for success,
|
|
|
1223 non-zero for failure.
|
|
|
1224 The possible encoding names encountered are in 'encoding'.
|
|
|
1225 Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are
|
|
|
1226 used.
|
|
|
1227 Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8"
|
|
|
1228 is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this.
|
|
|
1229 'charconvert' is also used to convert the viminfo file, if the 'c'
|
|
|
1230 flag is present in 'viminfo'. Also used for Unicode conversion.
|
|
|
1231 Example: >
|
|
|
1232 set charconvert=CharConvert()
|
|
|
1233 fun CharConvert()
|
|
|
1234 system("recode "
|
|
|
1235 \ . v:charconvert_from . ".." . v:charconvert_to
|
|
|
1236 \ . " <" . v:fname_in . " >" v:fname_out)
|
|
|
1237 return v:shell_error
|
|
|
1238 endfun
|
|
|
1239 < The related Vim variables are:
|
|
|
1240 v:charconvert_from name of the current encoding
|
|
|
1241 v:charconvert_to name of the desired encoding
|
|
|
1242 v:fname_in name of the input file
|
|
|
1243 v:fname_out name of the output file
|
|
|
1244 Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same.
|
|
|
1245 Note that v:charconvert_from and v:charconvert_to may be different
|
|
|
1246 from 'encoding'. Vim internally uses UTF-8 instead of UCS-2 or UCS-4.
|
|
|
1247 Encryption is not done by Vim when using 'charconvert'. If you want
|
|
|
1248 to encrypt the file after conversion, 'charconvert' should take care
|
|
|
1249 of this.
|
|
|
1250 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
1251 security reasons.
|
|
|
1252
|
|
|
1253 *'cindent'* *'cin'* *'nocindent'* *'nocin'*
|
|
|
1254 'cindent' 'cin' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
1255 local to buffer
|
|
|
1256 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1257 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
|
|
1258 feature}
|
|
|
1259 Enables automatic C program indenting See 'cinkeys' to set the keys
|
|
|
1260 that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your
|
|
|
1261 preferred indent style.
|
|
|
1262 If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'.
|
|
|
1263 If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty,
|
|
|
1264 the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an
|
|
|
1265 external program.
|
|
|
1266 See |C-indenting|.
|
|
|
1267 When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent'
|
|
|
1268 option or 'indentexpr'.
|
|
|
1269 This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
|
|
|
1270 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
1271
|
|
|
1272 *'cinkeys'* *'cink'*
|
|
|
1273 'cinkeys' 'cink' string (default "0{,0},0),:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
|
|
|
1274 local to buffer
|
|
|
1275 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1276 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
|
|
1277 feature}
|
|
|
1278 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
|
|
|
1279 the current line. Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is
|
|
|
1280 empty.
|
|
|
1281 For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|.
|
|
|
1282 See |C-indenting|.
|
|
|
1283
|
|
|
1284 *'cinoptions'* *'cino'*
|
|
|
1285 'cinoptions' 'cino' string (default "")
|
|
|
1286 local to buffer
|
|
|
1287 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1288 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
|
|
1289 feature}
|
|
|
1290 The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C
|
|
|
1291 program. See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and
|
|
|
1292 |C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general.
|
|
|
1293
|
|
|
1294
|
|
|
1295 *'cinwords'* *'cinw'*
|
|
|
1296 'cinwords' 'cinw' string (default "if,else,while,do,for,switch")
|
|
|
1297 local to buffer
|
|
|
1298 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1299 {not available when compiled without both the
|
|
|
1300 |+cindent| and the |+smartindent| features}
|
|
|
1301 These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when
|
|
|
1302 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set. For 'cindent' this is only done at
|
|
|
1303 an appropriate place (inside {}).
|
|
|
1304 Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'. If case doesn't
|
|
|
1305 matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase:
|
|
|
1306 "if,If,IF".
|
|
|
1307
|
|
|
1308 *'clipboard'* *'cb'*
|
|
|
1309 'clipboard' 'cb' string (default "autoselect,exclude:cons\|linux"
|
|
|
1310 for X-windows, "" otherwise)
|
|
|
1311 global
|
|
|
1312 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1313 {only in GUI versions or when the |+xterm_clipboard|
|
|
|
1314 feature is included}
|
|
|
1315 This option is a list of comma separated names.
|
|
|
1316 These names are recognized:
|
|
|
1317
|
|
|
1318 unnamed When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*'
|
|
|
1319 for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
|
|
|
1320 would normally go to the unnamed register. When a
|
|
|
1321 register is explicitly specified, it will always be
|
|
|
1322 used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard'
|
|
|
1323 or not. The clipboard register can always be
|
|
|
1324 explicitly accessed using the "* notation. Also see
|
|
|
1325 |gui-clipboard|.
|
|
|
1326
|
|
|
1327 autoselect Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present,
|
|
|
1328 then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual
|
|
|
1329 area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the
|
|
|
1330 windowing system's global selection or put the
|
|
|
1331 selected text on the clipboard used by the selection
|
|
|
1332 register "*. See |guioptions_a| and |quotestar| for
|
|
|
1333 details. When the GUI is active, the 'a' flag in
|
|
|
1334 'guioptions' is used, when the GUI is not active, this
|
|
|
1335 "autoselect" flag is used.
|
|
|
1336 Also applies to the modeless selection.
|
|
|
1337
|
|
|
1338 autoselectml Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection
|
|
|
1339 only. Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'.
|
|
|
1340
|
|
|
1341 exclude:{pattern}
|
|
|
1342 Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of
|
|
|
1343 the terminal 'term'. If there is a match, no
|
|
|
1344 connection will be made to the X server. This is
|
|
|
1345 useful in this situation:
|
|
|
1346 - Running Vim in a console.
|
|
|
1347 - $DISPLAY is set to start applications on another
|
|
|
1348 display.
|
|
|
1349 - You do not want to connect to the X server in the
|
|
|
1350 console, but do want this in a terminal emulator.
|
|
|
1351 To never connect to the X server use: >
|
|
|
1352 exclude:.*
|
|
|
1353 < This has the same effect as using the |-X| argument.
|
|
|
1354 Note that when there is no connection to the X server
|
|
|
1355 the window title won't be restored and the clipboard
|
|
|
1356 cannot be accessed.
|
|
|
1357 The value of 'magic' is ignored, {pattern} is
|
|
|
1358 interpreted as if 'magic' was on.
|
|
|
1359 The rest of the option value will be used for
|
|
|
1360 {pattern}, this must be the last entry.
|
|
|
1361
|
|
|
1362 *'cmdheight'* *'ch'*
|
|
|
1363 'cmdheight' 'ch' number (default 1)
|
|
|
1364 global
|
|
|
1365 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1366 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line. Helps avoiding
|
|
|
1367 |hit-enter| prompts.
|
|
|
1368
|
|
|
1369 *'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'*
|
|
|
1370 'cmdwinheight' 'cwh' number (default 7)
|
|
|
1371 global
|
|
|
1372 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1373 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
|
|
|
1374 feature}
|
|
|
1375 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin|
|
|
|
1376
|
|
|
1377 *'columns'* *'co'* *E594*
|
|
|
1378 'columns' 'co' number (default 80 or terminal width)
|
|
|
1379 global
|
|
|
1380 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1381 Number of columns of the screen. Normally this is set by the terminal
|
|
|
1382 initialization and does not have to be set by hand.
|
|
|
1383 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
|
|
|
1384 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want
|
|
|
1385 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
|
|
|
1386 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
|
|
|
1387 number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up.
|
|
|
1388
|
|
|
1389 *'comments'* *'com'* *E524* *E525*
|
|
|
1390 'comments' 'com' string (default
|
|
|
1391 "s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-")
|
|
|
1392 local to buffer
|
|
|
1393 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1394 {not available when compiled without the |+comments|
|
|
|
1395 feature}
|
|
|
1396 A comma separated list of strings that can start a comment line. See
|
|
|
1397 |format-comments|. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to
|
|
|
1398 insert a space.
|
|
|
1399
|
|
|
1400 *'commentstring'* *'cms'* *E537*
|
|
|
1401 'commentstring' 'cms' string (default "/*%s*/")
|
|
|
1402 local to buffer
|
|
|
1403 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1404 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
1405 feature}
|
|
|
1406 A template for a comment. The "%s" in the value is replaced with the
|
|
|
1407 comment text. Currently only used to add markers for folding, see
|
|
|
1408 |fold-marker|.
|
|
|
1409
|
|
|
1410 *'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'*
|
|
|
1411 'compatible' 'cp' boolean (default on, off when a .vimrc file is found)
|
|
|
1412 global
|
|
|
1413 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1414 This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or
|
|
|
1415 make Vim behave in a more useful way.
|
|
|
1416 This is a special kind of option, because when it's set or reset,
|
|
|
1417 other options are also changed as a side effect. CAREFUL: Setting or
|
|
|
1418 resetting this option can have a lot of unexpected effects: Mappings
|
|
10
|
1419 are interpreted in another way, undo behaves differently, etc. If you
|
|
7
|
1420 set this option in your vimrc file, you should probably put it at the
|
|
|
1421 very start.
|
|
|
1422 By default this option is on and the Vi defaults are used for the
|
|
|
1423 options. This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim
|
|
|
1424 just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible'
|
|
|
1425 option.
|
|
|
1426 When a ".vimrc" file is found while Vim is starting up, this option is
|
|
|
1427 switched off, and all options that have not been modified will be set
|
|
|
1428 to the Vim defaults. Effectively, this means that when a ".vimrc"
|
|
|
1429 file exists, Vim will use the Vim defaults, otherwise it will use the
|
|
|
1430 Vi defaults. (Note: This doesn't happen for the system-wide vimrc
|
|
10
|
1431 file). Also see |compatible-default|.
|
|
7
|
1432 You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with
|
|
|
1433 "-N". See |-C| and |-N|.
|
|
|
1434 Switching this option off makes the Vim defaults be used for options
|
|
|
1435 that have a different Vi and Vim default value. See the options
|
|
|
1436 marked with a '+' below. Other options are not modified.
|
|
|
1437 At the moment this option is set, several other options will be set
|
|
|
1438 or reset to make Vim as Vi-compatible as possible. See the table
|
|
10
|
1439 below. This can be used if you want to revert to Vi compatible
|
|
7
|
1440 editing.
|
|
|
1441 See also 'cpoptions'.
|
|
|
1442
|
|
|
1443 option + set value effect ~
|
|
|
1444
|
|
|
1445 'allowrevins' off no CTRL-_ command
|
|
|
1446 'backupcopy' Unix: "yes" backup file is a copy
|
|
|
1447 others: "auto" copy or rename backup file
|
|
|
1448 'backspace' "" normal backspace
|
|
|
1449 'backup' off no backup file
|
|
|
1450 'cindent' off no C code indentation
|
|
|
1451 'cedit' + "" no key to open the |cmdwin|
|
|
|
1452 'cpoptions' + (all flags) Vi-compatible flags
|
|
|
1453 'cscopetag' off don't use cscope for ":tag"
|
|
|
1454 'cscopetagorder' 0 see |cscopetagorder|
|
|
|
1455 'cscopeverbose' off see |cscopeverbose|
|
|
|
1456 'digraph' off no digraphs
|
|
|
1457 'esckeys' + off no <Esc>-keys in Insert mode
|
|
|
1458 'expandtab' off tabs not expanded to spaces
|
|
|
1459 'fileformats' + "" no automatic file format detection,
|
|
|
1460 "dos,unix" except for DOS, Windows and OS/2
|
|
|
1461 'formatoptions' + "vt" Vi compatible formatting
|
|
|
1462 'gdefault' off no default 'g' flag for ":s"
|
|
|
1463 'history' + 0 no commandline history
|
|
|
1464 'hkmap' off no Hebrew keyboard mapping
|
|
|
1465 'hkmapp' off no phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping
|
|
|
1466 'hlsearch' off no highlighting of search matches
|
|
|
1467 'incsearch' off no incremental searching
|
|
|
1468 'indentexpr' "" no indenting by expression
|
|
|
1469 'insertmode' off do not start in Insert mode
|
|
|
1470 'iskeyword' + "@,48-57,_" keywords contain alphanumeric
|
|
|
1471 characters and '_'
|
|
|
1472 'joinspaces' on insert 2 spaces after period
|
|
|
1473 'modeline' + off no modelines
|
|
|
1474 'more' + off no pauses in listings
|
|
|
1475 'revins' off no reverse insert
|
|
|
1476 'ruler' off no ruler
|
|
|
1477 'scrolljump' 1 no jump scroll
|
|
|
1478 'scrolloff' 0 no scroll offset
|
|
|
1479 'shiftround' off indent not rounded to shiftwidth
|
|
|
1480 'shortmess' + "" no shortening of messages
|
|
|
1481 'showcmd' + off command characters not shown
|
|
|
1482 'showmode' + off current mode not shown
|
|
|
1483 'smartcase' off no automatic ignore case switch
|
|
|
1484 'smartindent' off no smart indentation
|
|
|
1485 'smarttab' off no smart tab size
|
|
|
1486 'softtabstop' 0 tabs are always 'tabstop' positions
|
|
|
1487 'startofline' on goto startofline with some commands
|
|
|
1488 'tagrelative' + off tag file names are not relative
|
|
|
1489 'textauto' + off no automatic textmode detection
|
|
|
1490 'textwidth' 0 no automatic line wrap
|
|
|
1491 'tildeop' off tilde is not an operator
|
|
|
1492 'ttimeout' off no terminal timeout
|
|
|
1493 'whichwrap' + "" left-right movements don't wrap
|
|
|
1494 'wildchar' + CTRL-E only when the current value is <Tab>
|
|
|
1495 use CTRL-E for cmdline completion
|
|
|
1496 'writebackup' on or off depends on +writebackup feature
|
|
|
1497
|
|
|
1498 *'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535*
|
|
|
1499 'complete' 'cpt' string (default: ".,w,b,u,t,i")
|
|
|
1500 local to buffer
|
|
|
1501 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1502 This option specifies how keyword completion |ins-completion| works
|
|
|
1503 when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used. It is also used for whole-line
|
|
|
1504 completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|. It indicates the type of completion
|
|
|
1505 and the places to scan. It is a comma separated list of flags:
|
|
|
1506 . scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
|
|
|
1507 w scan buffers from other windows
|
|
|
1508 b scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
|
|
|
1509 u scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
|
|
|
1510 U scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list
|
|
|
1511 k scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option
|
|
|
1512 k{dict} scan the file {dict}. Several "k" flags can be given,
|
|
|
1513 patterns are valid too. For example: >
|
|
|
1514 :set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish
|
|
|
1515 < s scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option
|
|
|
1516 s{tsr} scan the file {tsr}. Several "s" flags can be given, patterns
|
|
|
1517 are valid too.
|
|
|
1518 i scan current and included files
|
|
|
1519 d scan current and included files for defined name or macro
|
|
|
1520 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
|
|
|
1521 ] tag completion
|
|
|
1522 t same as "]"
|
|
|
1523
|
|
|
1524 Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are
|
|
|
1525 not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files
|
|
|
1526 (gzipped files for example). Unloaded buffers are not scanned for
|
|
|
1527 whole-line completion.
|
|
|
1528
|
|
|
1529 The default is ".,w,b,u,t,i", which means to scan:
|
|
|
1530 1. the current buffer
|
|
|
1531 2. buffers in other windows
|
|
|
1532 3. other loaded buffers
|
|
|
1533 4. unloaded buffers
|
|
|
1534 5. tags
|
|
|
1535 6. included files
|
|
|
1536
|
|
|
1537 As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'-
|
|
|
1538 based expansion (eg dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included patterns
|
|
|
1539 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| and normal expansions)
|
|
|
1540
|
|
12
|
1541 *'completefunc'* *'cfu'*
|
|
|
1542 'completefunc' 'cfu' string (default: empty)
|
|
|
1543 local to buffer
|
|
|
1544 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1545 This option specifies a completion function to be used for CTRL-X
|
|
|
1546 CTRL-X. The function will be invoked with four arguments:
|
|
|
1547 a:line the text of the current line
|
|
|
1548 a:base the text with which matches should match
|
|
|
1549 a:col column in a:line where the cursor is, first column is
|
|
|
1550 zero
|
|
|
1551 a:findstart either 1 or 0
|
|
|
1552 When the a:findstart argument is 1, the function must return the
|
|
|
1553 column of where the completion starts. It must be a number between
|
|
|
1554 zero and "a:col". This involves looking at the characters in a:line
|
|
|
1555 before column a:col and include those characters that could be part of
|
|
|
1556 the completed item.
|
|
|
1557 When the a:findstart argument is 0 the function must return a string
|
|
|
1558 with the matching words, separated by newlines. When there are no
|
|
|
1559 matches return an empty string.
|
|
|
1560 An example that completes the names of the months: >
|
|
|
1561 fun! CompleteMonths(line, base, col, findstart)
|
|
|
1562 if a:findstart
|
|
|
1563 " locate start column of word
|
|
|
1564 let start = a:col
|
|
|
1565 while start > 0 && a:line[start - 1] =~ '\a'
|
|
|
1566 let start = start - 1
|
|
|
1567 endwhile
|
|
|
1568 return start
|
|
|
1569 else
|
|
|
1570 " find months matching with "a:base"
|
|
|
1571 let res = "Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec"
|
|
|
1572 if a:base != ''
|
|
|
1573 let res = substitute(res, '\c\<\(\(' . a:base . '.\{-}\>\)\|.\{-}\>\)', '\2', 'g')
|
|
|
1574 endif
|
|
|
1575 let res = substitute(res, ' \+', "\n", 'g')
|
|
|
1576 return res
|
|
|
1577 endif
|
|
|
1578 endfun
|
|
|
1579 set completefunc=CompleteMonths
|
|
|
1580 < Note that a substitute() function is used to reduce the list of
|
|
|
1581 possible values and remove the ones that don't match the base. The
|
|
|
1582 part before the "\|" matches the base, the part after it is used
|
|
|
1583 when there is no match. The "\2" in the replacement is empty if the
|
|
|
1584 part before the "\|" does not match.
|
|
14
|
1585
|
|
7
|
1586 *'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'*
|
|
|
1587 'confirm' 'cf' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
1588 global
|
|
|
1589 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1590 When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally
|
|
|
1591 fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e",
|
|
|
1592 instead raise a |dialog| asking if you wish to save the current
|
|
|
1593 file(s). You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer.
|
|
|
1594 If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one
|
|
|
1595 command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm|
|
|
|
1596 command.
|
|
|
1597 Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.
|
|
|
1598
|
|
|
1599 *'conskey'* *'consk'* *'noconskey'* *'noconsk'*
|
|
|
1600 'conskey' 'consk' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
1601 global
|
|
|
1602 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS}
|
|
|
1603 When on direct console I/O is used to obtain a keyboard character.
|
|
10
|
1604 This should work in most cases. Also see |'bioskey'|. Together,
|
|
7
|
1605 three methods of console input are available:
|
|
|
1606 'conskey' 'bioskey' action ~
|
|
|
1607 on on or off direct console input
|
|
|
1608 off on BIOS
|
|
|
1609 off off STDIN
|
|
|
1610
|
|
|
1611 *'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'*
|
|
|
1612 'copyindent' 'ci' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
1613 local to buffer
|
|
|
1614 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1615 Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a
|
|
|
1616 new line. Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of
|
|
|
1617 tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled,
|
|
|
1618 in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option makes the
|
|
|
1619 new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the
|
|
|
1620 existing line. If the new indent is greater than on the existing
|
|
|
1621 line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner.
|
|
|
1622 NOTE: 'copyindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
1623 Also see 'preserveindent'.
|
|
|
1624
|
|
|
1625 *'cpoptions'* *'cpo'*
|
|
|
1626 'cpoptions' 'cpo' string (Vim default: "aABceFs",
|
|
|
1627 Vi default: all flags)
|
|
|
1628 global
|
|
|
1629 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1630 A sequence of single character flags. When a character is present
|
|
10
|
1631 this indicates vi-compatible behavior. This is used for things where
|
|
7
|
1632 not being vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred.
|
|
|
1633 'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options".
|
|
|
1634 Commas can be added for readability.
|
|
|
1635 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
|
|
|
1636 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
|
|
|
1637 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
1638 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
1639
|
|
|
1640 contains behavior ~
|
|
|
1641 *cpo-a*
|
|
|
1642 a When included, a ":read" command with a file name
|
|
|
1643 argument will set the alternate file name for the
|
|
|
1644 current window.
|
|
|
1645 *cpo-A*
|
|
|
1646 A When included, a ":write" command with a file name
|
|
|
1647 argument will set the alternate file name for the
|
|
|
1648 current window.
|
|
|
1649 *cpo-b*
|
|
|
1650 b "\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of
|
|
|
1651 the map command. The '\' is included in the mapping,
|
|
|
1652 the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next
|
|
|
1653 command. Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to
|
|
|
1654 include the '|' in the mapping. Applies to all
|
|
|
1655 mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands.
|
|
|
1656 See also |map_bar|.
|
|
|
1657 *cpo-B*
|
|
|
1658 B A backslash has no special meaning in mappings,
|
|
|
1659 abbreviations and the "to" part of the menu commands.
|
|
|
1660 Remove this flag to be able to use a backslash like a
|
|
|
1661 CTRL-V. For example, the command ":map X \<Esc>"
|
|
|
1662 results in X being mapped to:
|
|
|
1663 'B' included: "\^[" (^[ is a real <Esc>)
|
|
|
1664 'B' excluded: "<Esc>" (5 characters)
|
|
|
1665 ('<' excluded in both cases)
|
|
|
1666 *cpo-c*
|
|
|
1667 c Searching continues at the end of any match at the
|
|
|
1668 cursor position, but not further than the start of the
|
|
|
1669 next line. When not present searching continues
|
|
|
1670 one character from the cursor position. With 'c'
|
|
|
1671 "abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating
|
|
|
1672 "/abab", without 'c' there are five matches.
|
|
|
1673 *cpo-C*
|
|
|
1674 C Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a
|
|
|
1675 backslash. See |line-continuation|.
|
|
|
1676 *cpo-d*
|
|
|
1677 d Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use
|
|
|
1678 the tags file relative to the current file, but the
|
|
|
1679 tags file in the current directory.
|
|
|
1680 *cpo-D*
|
|
|
1681 D Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode
|
|
|
1682 commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and
|
|
|
1683 |t|.
|
|
|
1684 *cpo-e*
|
|
|
1685 e When executing a register with ":@r", always add a
|
|
|
1686 <CR> to the last line, also when the register is not
|
|
|
1687 linewise. If this flag is not present, the register
|
|
|
1688 is not linewise and the last line does not end in a
|
|
|
1689 <CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line
|
|
|
1690 and can be edited before hitting <CR>.
|
|
|
1691 *cpo-E*
|
|
|
1692 E It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or
|
|
|
1693 "gU" on an Empty region. The operators only work when
|
|
|
1694 at least one character is to be operate on. Example:
|
|
|
1695 This makes "y0" fail in the first column.
|
|
|
1696 *cpo-f*
|
|
|
1697 f When included, a ":read" command with a file name
|
|
|
1698 argument will set the file name for the current buffer,
|
|
|
1699 if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet.
|
|
|
1700 *cpo-F*
|
|
|
1701 F When included, a ":write" command with a file name
|
|
|
1702 argument will set the file name for the current
|
|
|
1703 buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
|
|
|
1704 yet.
|
|
|
1705 *cpo-g*
|
|
|
1706 g Goto line 1 when using ":edit" without argument.
|
|
|
1707 *cpo-i*
|
|
|
1708 i When included, interrupting the reading of a file will
|
|
|
1709 leave it modified.
|
|
10
|
1710 *cpo-I*
|
|
|
1711 I When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting
|
|
|
1712 indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent.
|
|
7
|
1713 *cpo-j*
|
|
|
1714 j When joining lines, only add two spaces after a '.',
|
|
|
1715 not after '!' or '?'. Also see 'joinspaces'.
|
|
|
1716 *cpo-J*
|
|
|
1717 J A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after
|
|
|
1718 the '.', '!' or '?'. A <Tab> is not recognized as
|
|
|
1719 white space.
|
|
|
1720 *cpo-k*
|
|
|
1721 k Disable the recognition of raw key codes in
|
|
|
1722 mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu
|
|
|
1723 commands. For example, if <Key> sends ^[OA (where ^[
|
|
|
1724 is <Esc>), the command ":map X ^[OA" results in X
|
|
|
1725 being mapped to:
|
|
|
1726 'k' included: "^[OA" (3 characters)
|
|
|
1727 'k' excluded: "<Key>" (one key code)
|
|
|
1728 Also see the '<' flag below.
|
|
|
1729 *cpo-K*
|
|
|
1730 K Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is
|
|
|
1731 halfway a mapping. This breaks mapping <F1><F1> when
|
|
|
1732 only part of the second <F1> has been read. It
|
|
|
1733 enables cancelling the mapping by typing <F1><Esc>.
|
|
|
1734 *cpo-l*
|
|
|
1735 l Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
|
|
|
1736 literally, only "\]" is special See |/[]|
|
|
|
1737 'l' included: "/[ \t]" finds <Space>, '\' and 't'
|
|
|
1738 'l' excluded: "/[ \t]" finds <Space> and <Tab>
|
|
|
1739 *cpo-L*
|
|
|
1740 L When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin',
|
|
|
1741 'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode
|
|
|
1742 (see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of
|
|
|
1743 the normal behavior of a <Tab>.
|
|
|
1744 *cpo-m*
|
|
|
1745 m When included, a showmatch will always wait half a
|
|
|
1746 second. When not included, a showmatch will wait half
|
|
|
1747 a second or until a character is typed. |'showmatch'|
|
|
|
1748 *cpo-M*
|
|
|
1749 M When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into
|
|
|
1750 account. Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer
|
|
|
1751 parenthesis match. When included "%" ignores
|
|
|
1752 backslashes, which is Vi compatible.
|
|
|
1753 *cpo-n*
|
|
|
1754 n When included, the column used for 'number' will also
|
|
|
1755 be used for text of wrapped lines.
|
|
|
1756 *cpo-o*
|
|
|
1757 o Line offset to search command is not remembered for
|
|
|
1758 next search.
|
|
|
1759 *cpo-O*
|
|
|
1760 O Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even
|
|
|
1761 when it didn't exist when editing it. This is a
|
|
|
1762 protection against a file unexpectedly created by
|
|
|
1763 someone else. Vi didn't complain about this.
|
|
|
1764 *cpo-p*
|
|
|
1765 p Vi compatible Lisp indenting. When not present, a
|
|
|
1766 slightly better algorithm is used.
|
|
|
1767 *cpo-r*
|
|
|
1768 r Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search
|
|
|
1769 command, instead of the actually used search string.
|
|
|
1770 *cpo-R*
|
|
|
1771 R Remove marks from filtered lines. Without this flag
|
|
|
1772 marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used.
|
|
|
1773 *cpo-s*
|
|
|
1774 s Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the
|
|
|
1775 first time. This is like it is in Vim version 3.0.
|
|
10
|
1776 And it is the default. If not present the options are
|
|
7
|
1777 set when the buffer is created.
|
|
|
1778 *cpo-S*
|
|
|
1779 S Set buffer options always when entering a buffer
|
|
|
1780 (except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and
|
|
|
1781 'syntax'). This is the (most) Vi compatible setting.
|
|
|
1782 The options are set to the values in the current
|
|
|
1783 buffer. When you change an option and go to another
|
|
|
1784 buffer, the value is copied. Effectively makes the
|
|
|
1785 buffer options global to all buffers.
|
|
|
1786
|
|
|
1787 's' 'S' copy buffer options
|
|
|
1788 no no when buffer created
|
|
|
1789 yes no when buffer first entered (default)
|
|
|
1790 X yes each time when buffer entered (vi comp.)
|
|
|
1791 *cpo-t*
|
|
|
1792 t Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for
|
|
|
1793 "n" command. Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in
|
|
|
1794 the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the
|
|
|
1795 last used search pattern.
|
|
|
1796 *cpo-u*
|
|
10
|
1797 u Undo is Vi compatible. See |undo-two-ways|.
|
|
7
|
1798 *cpo-v*
|
|
|
1799 v Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in
|
|
|
1800 Insert mode. Without this flag the characters are
|
|
|
1801 erased from the screen right away. With this flag the
|
|
|
1802 screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced
|
|
|
1803 characters.
|
|
|
1804 *cpo-w*
|
|
|
1805 w When using "cw" on a blank character, only change one
|
|
|
1806 character and not all blanks until the start of the
|
|
|
1807 next word.
|
|
|
1808 *cpo-W*
|
|
|
1809 W Don't overwrite a readonly file. When omitted, ":w!"
|
|
|
1810 overwrites a readonly file, if possible.
|
|
|
1811 *cpo-x*
|
|
|
1812 x <Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line.
|
|
|
1813 The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line,
|
|
|
1814 because <Esc> normally aborts a command. |c_<Esc>|
|
|
|
1815 *cpo-y*
|
|
|
1816 y A yank command can be redone with ".".
|
|
|
1817 *cpo-!*
|
|
|
1818 ! When redoing a filter command, use the last used
|
|
|
1819 external command, whatever it was. Otherwise the last
|
|
|
1820 used -filter- command is used.
|
|
|
1821 *cpo-$*
|
|
|
1822 $ When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the
|
|
|
1823 line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text.
|
|
|
1824 The changed text will be overwritten when you type the
|
|
|
1825 new text. The line is redisplayed if you type any
|
|
|
1826 command that moves the cursor from the insertion
|
|
|
1827 point.
|
|
|
1828 *cpo-%*
|
|
|
1829 % Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command.
|
|
|
1830 Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc.
|
|
|
1831 Does not recognize "/*" and "*/".
|
|
|
1832 Parens inside single and double quotes are also
|
|
|
1833 counted, causing a string that contains a paren to
|
|
|
1834 disturb the matching. For example, in a line like
|
|
|
1835 "if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not
|
|
|
1836 match the last one. When this flag is not included,
|
|
|
1837 parens inside single and double quotes are treated
|
|
|
1838 specially. When matching a paren outside of quotes,
|
|
|
1839 everything inside quotes is ignored. When matching a
|
|
|
1840 paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if
|
|
10
|
1841 there is one). This works very well for C programs.
|
|
36
|
1842 This flag is also used for other features, such as
|
|
|
1843 C-indenting.
|
|
|
1844 cpo-star*
|
|
7
|
1845 * Use ":*" in the same way as ":@". When not included,
|
|
|
1846 ":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area.
|
|
|
1847 *cpo-<*
|
|
|
1848 < Disable the recognition of special key codes in |<>|
|
|
|
1849 form in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of
|
|
10
|
1850 menu commands. For example, the command
|
|
7
|
1851 ":map X <Tab>" results in X being mapped to:
|
|
|
1852 '<' included: "<Tab>" (5 characters)
|
|
|
1853 '<' excluded: "^I" (^I is a real <Tab>)
|
|
|
1854 Also see the 'k' flag above.
|
|
|
1855
|
|
|
1856 *'cscopepathcomp'* *'cspc'*
|
|
|
1857 'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc' number (default 0)
|
|
|
1858 global
|
|
|
1859 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
|
|
1860 feature}
|
|
|
1861 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1862 Determines how many components of the path to show in a list of tags.
|
|
|
1863 See |cscopepathcomp|.
|
|
|
1864
|
|
|
1865 *'cscopeprg'* *'csprg'*
|
|
|
1866 'cscopeprg' 'csprg' string (default "cscope")
|
|
|
1867 global
|
|
|
1868 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
|
|
1869 feature}
|
|
|
1870 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1871 Specifies the command to execute cscope. See |cscopeprg|.
|
|
|
1872 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
1873 security reasons.
|
|
|
1874
|
|
|
1875 *'cscopequickfix'* *'csqf'*
|
|
|
1876 'cscopequickfix' 'csqf' string (default "")
|
|
|
1877 global
|
|
|
1878 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
|
|
1879 or |+quickfix| features}
|
|
|
1880 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1881 Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results.
|
|
|
1882 See |cscopequickfix|.
|
|
|
1883
|
|
|
1884 *'cscopetag'* *'cst'* *'nocscopetag'* *'nocst'*
|
|
|
1885 'cscopetag' 'cst' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
1886 global
|
|
|
1887 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
|
|
1888 feature}
|
|
|
1889 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1890 Use cscope for tag commands. See |cscope-options|.
|
|
|
1891 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
1892
|
|
|
1893 *'cscopetagorder'* *'csto'*
|
|
|
1894 'cscopetagorder' 'csto' number (default 0)
|
|
|
1895 global
|
|
|
1896 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
|
|
1897 feature}
|
|
|
1898 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1899 Determines the order in which ":cstag" performs a search. See
|
|
|
1900 |cscopetagorder|.
|
|
|
1901 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
1902
|
|
|
1903 *'cscopeverbose'* *'csverb'*
|
|
|
1904 *'nocscopeverbose'* *'nocsverb'*
|
|
|
1905 'cscopeverbose' 'csverb' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
1906 global
|
|
|
1907 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
|
|
1908 feature}
|
|
|
1909 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1910 Give messages when adding a cscope database. See |cscopeverbose|.
|
|
|
1911 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
1912
|
|
|
1913 *'debug'*
|
|
|
1914 'debug' string (default "")
|
|
|
1915 global
|
|
|
1916 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1917 When set to "msg", error messages that would otherwise be omitted will
|
|
|
1918 be given anyway. This is useful when debugging 'foldexpr' or
|
|
|
1919 'indentexpr'.
|
|
|
1920
|
|
|
1921 *'define'* *'def'*
|
|
|
1922 'define' 'def' string (default "^\s*#\s*define")
|
|
|
1923 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
|
1924 {not in Vi}
|
|
10
|
1925 Pattern to be used to find a macro definition. It is a search
|
|
7
|
1926 pattern, just like for the "/" command. This option is used for the
|
|
|
1927 commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|. The 'isident' option is
|
|
|
1928 used to recognize the defined name after the match:
|
|
|
1929 {match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char}
|
|
|
1930 See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space
|
|
|
1931 or backslash.
|
|
|
1932 The default value is for C programs. For C++ this value would be
|
|
|
1933 useful, to include const type declarations: >
|
|
|
1934 ^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\)
|
|
|
1935 < When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes!
|
|
|
1936
|
|
|
1937 *'delcombine'* *'deco'* *'nodelcombine'* *'nodeco'*
|
|
|
1938 'delcombine' 'deco' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
1939 global
|
|
|
1940 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1941 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
|
1942 feature}
|
|
|
1943 If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode
|
|
|
1944 "x" delete each combining character on its own. When it is off (the
|
|
|
1945 default) the character along with its combining characters are
|
|
|
1946 deleted.
|
|
|
1947 Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work different from "2x"!
|
|
|
1948
|
|
|
1949 This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one
|
|
|
1950 may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want
|
|
|
1951 to remove only the combining ones.
|
|
|
1952
|
|
|
1953 *'dictionary'* *'dict'*
|
|
|
1954 'dictionary' 'dict' string (default "")
|
|
|
1955 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
|
1956 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1957 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
|
|
|
1958 for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|. Each file should
|
|
|
1959 contain a list of words. This can be one word per line, or several
|
|
|
1960 words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is
|
|
|
1961 preferred). Maximum line length is 510 bytes.
|
|
10
|
1962 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces
|
|
7
|
1963 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
|
|
|
1964 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
|
|
|
1965 Where to find a list of words?
|
|
|
1966 - On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words".
|
|
|
1967 - In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory.
|
|
|
1968 - In "miscfiles" of the GNU collection.
|
|
|
1969 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
|
1970 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
|
1971 uses another default.
|
|
|
1972 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
|
|
|
1973
|
|
|
1974 *'diff'* *'nodiff'*
|
|
|
1975 'diff' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
1976 local to window
|
|
|
1977 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1978 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
|
|
|
1979 feature}
|
|
|
1980 Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences
|
|
10
|
1981 between files. See |vimdiff|.
|
|
7
|
1982
|
|
|
1983 *'dex'* *'diffexpr'*
|
|
|
1984 'diffexpr' 'dex' string (default "")
|
|
|
1985 global
|
|
|
1986 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1987 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
|
|
|
1988 feature}
|
|
|
1989 Expression which is evaluated to obtain an ed-style diff file from two
|
|
|
1990 versions of a file. See |diff-diffexpr|.
|
|
|
1991 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
1992 security reasons.
|
|
|
1993
|
|
|
1994 *'dip'* *'diffopt'*
|
|
|
1995 'diffopt' 'dip' string (default "filler")
|
|
|
1996 global
|
|
|
1997 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
1998 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
|
|
|
1999 feature}
|
|
10
|
2000 Option settings for diff mode. It can consist of the following items.
|
|
7
|
2001 All are optional. Items must be separated by a comma.
|
|
|
2002
|
|
|
2003 filler Show filler lines, to keep the text
|
|
|
2004 synchronized with a window that has inserted
|
|
|
2005 lines at the same position. Mostly useful
|
|
|
2006 when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind'
|
|
|
2007 is set.
|
|
|
2008
|
|
|
2009 context:{n} Use a context of {n} lines between a change
|
|
|
2010 and a fold that contains unchanged lines.
|
|
|
2011 When omitted a context of six lines is used.
|
|
|
2012 See |fold-diff|.
|
|
|
2013
|
|
|
2014 icase Ignore changes in case of text. "a" and "A"
|
|
|
2015 are considered the same. Adds the "-i" flag
|
|
|
2016 to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty.
|
|
|
2017
|
|
|
2018 iwhite Ignore changes in amount of white space. Adds
|
|
|
2019 the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if
|
|
|
2020 'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation
|
|
|
2021 of the "diff" command for what this does
|
|
|
2022 exactly. It should ignore adding trailing
|
|
|
2023 white space, but not leading white space.
|
|
|
2024
|
|
|
2025 Examples: >
|
|
|
2026
|
|
|
2027 :set diffopt=filler,context:4
|
|
|
2028 :set diffopt=
|
|
|
2029 :set diffopt=filler
|
|
|
2030 <
|
|
|
2031 *'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'*
|
|
|
2032 'digraph' 'dg' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
2033 global
|
|
|
2034 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2035 {not available when compiled without the |+digraphs|
|
|
|
2036 feature}
|
|
|
2037 Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS>
|
|
|
2038 {char2}. See |digraphs|.
|
|
|
2039 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
2040
|
|
|
2041 *'directory'* *'dir'*
|
|
|
2042 'directory' 'dir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:",
|
|
|
2043 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:\tmp,c:\temp"
|
|
|
2044 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,/var/tmp,/tmp")
|
|
|
2045 global
|
|
|
2046 List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas.
|
|
|
2047 - The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is
|
|
|
2048 possible.
|
|
|
2049 - Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is
|
|
|
2050 impossible!).
|
|
|
2051 - A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as
|
|
|
2052 the edited file. On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so
|
|
|
2053 it doesn't show in a directory listing. On MS-Windows the "hidden"
|
|
|
2054 attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible.
|
|
33
|
2055 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to
|
|
7
|
2056 put the swap file relative to where the edited file is. The leading
|
|
|
2057 "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
|
|
|
2058 - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators, the
|
|
|
2059 swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
|
|
|
2060 with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs. This will
|
|
|
2061 ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.
|
|
|
2062 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
|
|
|
2063 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory
|
|
|
2064 name, precede it with a backslash.
|
|
|
2065 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
|
|
|
2066 - A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'.
|
|
|
2067 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
|
2068 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
|
|
|
2069 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
|
|
|
2070 :set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
|
|
|
2071 < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
|
|
|
2072 of the option is removed.
|
|
|
2073 Using "." first in the list is recommended. This means that editing
|
|
|
2074 the same file twice will result in a warning. Using "/tmp" on Unix is
|
|
|
2075 discouraged: When the system crashes you lose the swap file.
|
|
|
2076 "/var/tmp" is often not cleared when rebooting, thus is a better
|
|
|
2077 choice than "/tmp". But it can contain a lot of files, your swap
|
|
|
2078 files get lost in the crowd. That is why a "tmp" directory in your
|
|
|
2079 home directory is tried first.
|
|
|
2080 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
|
2081 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
|
2082 uses another default.
|
|
|
2083 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
2084 security reasons.
|
|
|
2085 {Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"}
|
|
|
2086
|
|
|
2087 *'display'* *'dy'*
|
|
|
2088 'display' 'dy' string (default "")
|
|
|
2089 global
|
|
|
2090 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2091 Change the way text is displayed. This is comma separated list of
|
|
|
2092 flags:
|
|
|
2093 lastline When included, as much as possible of the last line
|
|
10
|
2094 in a window will be displayed. When not included, a
|
|
7
|
2095 last line that doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.
|
|
|
2096 uhex Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx>
|
|
|
2097 instead of using ^C and ~C.
|
|
|
2098
|
|
|
2099 *'eadirection'* *'ead'*
|
|
|
2100 'eadirection' 'ead' string (default "both")
|
|
|
2101 global
|
|
|
2102 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2103 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
|
|
|
2104 feature}
|
|
|
2105 Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies:
|
|
|
2106 ver vertically, width of windows is not affected
|
|
|
2107 hor horizontally, height of windows is not affected
|
|
|
2108 both width and height of windows is affected
|
|
|
2109
|
|
|
2110 *'ed'* *'edcompatible'* *'noed'* *'noedcompatible'*
|
|
|
2111 'edcompatible' 'ed' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
2112 global
|
|
|
2113 Makes the 'g' and 'c' flags of the ":substitute" command to be
|
|
|
2114 toggled each time the flag is given. See |complex-change|. See
|
|
|
2115 also 'gdefault' option.
|
|
|
2116 Switching this option on is discouraged!
|
|
|
2117
|
|
|
2118 *'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543*
|
|
|
2119 'encoding' 'enc' string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG)
|
|
|
2120 global
|
|
|
2121 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
|
2122 feature}
|
|
|
2123 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2124 Sets the character encoding used inside Vim. It applies to text in
|
|
|
2125 the buffers, registers, Strings in expressions, text stored in the
|
|
|
2126 viminfo file, etc. It sets the kind of characters which Vim can work
|
|
|
2127 with. See |encoding-names| for the possible values.
|
|
|
2128
|
|
|
2129 NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the
|
|
|
2130 existing text in Vim. It may cause multi-byte text to become invalid.
|
|
|
2131 It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim
|
|
|
2132 starts up. See |multibyte|.
|
|
|
2133
|
|
|
2134 NOTE: For GTK+ 2 it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' to
|
|
|
2135 "utf-8". Although care has been taken to allow different values of
|
|
|
2136 'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and
|
|
|
2137 avoids unnecessary conversion overhead. "utf-8" has not been made
|
|
10
|
2138 the default to prevent different behavior of the GUI and terminal
|
|
7
|
2139 versions, and to avoid changing the encoding of newly created files
|
|
|
2140 without your knowledge (in case 'fileencodings' is empty).
|
|
|
2141
|
|
|
2142 The character encoding of files can be different from 'encoding'.
|
|
10
|
2143 This is specified with 'fileencoding'. The conversion is done with
|
|
7
|
2144 iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'.
|
|
|
2145
|
|
|
2146 Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale. This will
|
|
|
2147 be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings. If
|
|
|
2148 'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be
|
|
|
2149 set to convert typed and displayed text. See |encoding-table|.
|
|
|
2150
|
|
|
2151 When you set this option, it fires the |EncodingChanged| autocommand
|
|
|
2152 event so that you can set up fonts if necessary.
|
|
|
2153
|
|
|
2154 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus
|
|
|
2155 you can set it with uppercase values too. Underscores are translated
|
|
|
2156 to '-' signs.
|
|
|
2157 When the encoding is recognized, it is changed to the standard name.
|
|
|
2158 For example "Latin-1" becomes "latin1", "ISO_88592" becomes
|
|
|
2159 "iso-8859-2" and "utf8" becomes "utf-8".
|
|
|
2160
|
|
|
2161 Note: "latin1" is also used when the encoding could not be detected.
|
|
|
2162 This only works when editing files in the same encoding! When the
|
|
|
2163 actual character set is not latin1, make sure 'fileencoding' and
|
|
|
2164 'fileencodings' are empty. When conversion is needed, switch to using
|
|
|
2165 utf-8.
|
|
|
2166
|
|
|
2167 When "unicode", "ucs-2" or "ucs-4" is used, Vim internally uses utf-8.
|
|
|
2168 You don't notice this while editing, but it does matter for the
|
|
|
2169 |viminfo-file|. And Vim expects the terminal to use utf-8 too. Thus
|
|
|
2170 setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has
|
|
|
2171 effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty.
|
|
|
2172
|
|
|
2173 When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was
|
|
|
2174 not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed.
|
|
|
2175
|
|
|
2176 *'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'*
|
|
|
2177 'endofline' 'eol' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
2178 local to buffer
|
|
|
2179 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2180 When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
|
|
10
|
2181 is on, no <EOL> will be written for the last line in the file. This
|
|
7
|
2182 option is automatically set when starting to edit a new file, unless
|
|
|
2183 the file does not have an <EOL> for the last line in the file, in
|
|
|
2184 which case it is reset. Normally you don't have to set or reset this
|
|
|
2185 option. When 'binary' is off the value is not used when writing the
|
|
|
2186 file. When 'binary' is on it is used to remember the presence of a
|
|
|
2187 <EOL> for the last line in the file, so that when you write the file
|
|
|
2188 the situation from the original file can be kept. But you can change
|
|
|
2189 it if you want to.
|
|
|
2190
|
|
|
2191 *'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'*
|
|
|
2192 'equalalways' 'ea' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
2193 global
|
|
|
2194 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2195 When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after
|
|
33
|
2196 splitting or closing a window. This also happens the moment the
|
|
|
2197 option is switched on. When off, splitting a window will reduce the
|
|
|
2198 size of the current window and leave the other windows the same. When
|
|
|
2199 closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it
|
|
|
2200 (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').
|
|
7
|
2201 When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size
|
|
|
2202 is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room. The
|
|
|
2203 'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected.
|
|
|
2204 Changing the height of a window can be avoided by setting
|
|
|
2205 'winfixheight'.
|
|
|
2206
|
|
|
2207 *'equalprg'* *'ep'*
|
|
|
2208 'equalprg' 'ep' string (default "")
|
|
|
2209 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
|
2210 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2211 External program to use for "=" command. When this option is empty
|
|
|
2212 the internal formatting functions are used ('lisp', 'cindent' or
|
|
|
2213 'indentexpr').
|
|
10
|
2214 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash|
|
|
7
|
2215 about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
|
2216 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
2217 security reasons.
|
|
|
2218
|
|
|
2219 *'errorbells'* *'eb'* *'noerrorbells'* *'noeb'*
|
|
|
2220 'errorbells' 'eb' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
2221 global
|
|
|
2222 Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages. This only
|
|
|
2223 makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always
|
|
|
2224 for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal
|
|
10
|
2225 mode). See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep,
|
|
7
|
2226 screen flash or do nothing.
|
|
|
2227
|
|
|
2228 *'errorfile'* *'ef'*
|
|
|
2229 'errorfile' 'ef' string (Amiga default: "AztecC.Err",
|
|
|
2230 others: "errors.err")
|
|
|
2231 global
|
|
|
2232 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2233 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
|
|
2234 feature}
|
|
|
2235 Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|).
|
|
|
2236 When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the
|
|
|
2237 following argument. See |-q|.
|
|
|
2238 NOT used for the ":make" command. See 'makeef' for that.
|
|
|
2239 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
|
2240 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
|
2241 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
2242 security reasons.
|
|
|
2243
|
|
|
2244 *'errorformat'* *'efm'*
|
|
|
2245 'errorformat' 'efm' string (default is very long)
|
|
|
2246 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
|
2247 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2248 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
|
|
2249 feature}
|
|
|
2250 Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file
|
|
|
2251 (see |errorformat|).
|
|
|
2252
|
|
|
2253 *'esckeys'* *'ek'* *'noesckeys'* *'noek'*
|
|
|
2254 'esckeys' 'ek' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
|
|
2255 global
|
|
|
2256 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2257 Function keys that start with an <Esc> are recognized in Insert
|
|
|
2258 mode. When this option is off, the cursor and function keys cannot be
|
|
|
2259 used in Insert mode if they start with an <Esc>. The advantage of
|
|
|
2260 this is that the single <Esc> is recognized immediately, instead of
|
|
|
2261 after one second. Instead of resetting this option, you might want to
|
|
|
2262 try changing the values for 'timeoutlen' and 'ttimeoutlen'. Note that
|
|
|
2263 when 'esckeys' is off, you can still map anything, but the cursor keys
|
|
|
2264 won't work by default.
|
|
|
2265 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
2266 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
2267
|
|
|
2268 *'eventignore'* *'ei'*
|
|
|
2269 'eventignore' 'ei' string (default "")
|
|
|
2270 global
|
|
|
2271 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2272 {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
|
|
|
2273 feature}
|
|
|
2274 A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored.
|
|
|
2275 When set to "all", all autocommand events are ignored, autocommands
|
|
|
2276 will not be executed.
|
|
|
2277 Otherwise this is a comma separated list of event names. Example: >
|
|
|
2278 :set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave
|
|
|
2279 <
|
|
|
2280 *'expandtab'* *'et'* *'noexpandtab'* *'noet'*
|
|
|
2281 'expandtab' 'et' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
2282 local to buffer
|
|
|
2283 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2284 In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a
|
|
10
|
2285 <Tab>. Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and
|
|
7
|
2286 when 'autoindent' is on. To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is
|
|
|
2287 on, use CTRL-V<Tab>. See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|.
|
|
|
2288 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
2289
|
|
|
2290 *'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'*
|
|
|
2291 'exrc' 'ex' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
2292 global
|
|
|
2293 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2294 Enables the reading of .vimrc, .exrc and .gvimrc in the current
|
|
|
2295 directory. If you switch this option on you should also consider
|
|
|
2296 setting the 'secure' option (see |initialization|). Using a local
|
|
|
2297 .exrc, .vimrc or .gvimrc is a potential security leak, use with care!
|
|
|
2298 also see |.vimrc| and |gui-init|.
|
|
|
2299 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
2300 security reasons.
|
|
|
2301
|
|
|
2302 *'fileencoding'* *'fenc'* *E213*
|
|
|
2303 'fileencoding' 'fenc' string (default: "")
|
|
|
2304 local to buffer
|
|
|
2305 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
|
2306 feature}
|
|
|
2307 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2308 Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer.
|
|
|
2309 When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be
|
|
|
2310 done when reading and writing the file.
|
|
|
2311 When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be
|
|
|
2312 used (no conversion when reading or writing a file).
|
|
|
2313 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When
|
|
|
2314 'encoding' is "utf-8" conversion is most likely done in a way
|
|
|
2315 that the reverse conversion results in the same text. When
|
|
|
2316 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some characters may be lost!
|
|
|
2317 See 'encoding' for the possible values. Additionally, values may be
|
|
|
2318 specified that can be handled by the converter, see
|
|
|
2319 |mbyte-conversion|.
|
|
|
2320 When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'.
|
|
|
2321 To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting
|
|
|
2322 'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument.
|
|
|
2323 Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored.
|
|
|
2324 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus
|
|
|
2325 you can set it with uppercase values too. '_' characters are
|
|
|
2326 replaced with '-'. If a name is recognized from the list for
|
|
|
2327 'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name. For example
|
|
|
2328 "ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2".
|
|
|
2329 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
|
|
|
2330 option is set, because the file would be different when written.
|
|
|
2331 If you do this in a modeline, you might want to set 'nomodified' to
|
|
|
2332 avoid this.
|
|
|
2333 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
|
|
|
2334
|
|
|
2335 *'fe'*
|
|
|
2336 NOTE: Before version 6.0 this option specified the encoding for the
|
|
10
|
2337 whole of Vim, this was a mistake. Now use 'encoding' instead. The
|
|
7
|
2338 old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used.
|
|
|
2339
|
|
|
2340 *'fileencodings'* *'fencs'*
|
|
|
2341 'fileencodings' 'fencs' string (default: "ucs-bom", "ucs-bom,utf-8,latin1"
|
|
|
2342 when 'encoding' is set to a Unicode value)
|
|
|
2343 global
|
|
|
2344 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
|
2345 feature}
|
|
|
2346 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2347 This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit
|
|
|
2348 an existing file. When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first
|
|
|
2349 mentioned character encoding. If an error is detected, the next one
|
|
|
2350 in the list is tried. When an encoding is found that works,
|
|
10
|
2351 'fileencoding' is set to it. If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to
|
|
7
|
2352 an empty string, which means the value of 'encoding' is used.
|
|
|
2353 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When
|
|
|
2354 'encoding' is "utf-8" (or one of the other Unicode variants)
|
|
|
2355 conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse
|
|
|
2356 conversion results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not
|
|
|
2357 "utf-8" special characters may be lost!
|
|
|
2358 For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings
|
|
|
2359 will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except
|
|
|
2360 "ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present). If you prefer
|
|
|
2361 another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your
|
|
|
2362 preferred encoding is to be used. Example: >
|
|
|
2363 au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 |
|
|
|
2364 \ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif
|
|
|
2365 < This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain
|
|
|
2366 non-blank characters.
|
|
|
2367 Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for an new file, 'fileencoding'
|
|
|
2368 is always empty then. This means that a non-existing file may get a
|
|
|
2369 different encoding than an empty file.
|
|
|
2370 The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM
|
|
|
2371 (Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file. It must not be preceded
|
|
|
2372 by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly.
|
|
|
2373 An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last,
|
|
|
2374 because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always
|
|
|
2375 accepted.
|
|
|
2376 WRONG VALUES: WHAT'S WRONG:
|
|
|
2377 latin1,utf-8 "latin1" will always be used
|
|
|
2378 utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1 BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8
|
|
|
2379 file
|
|
|
2380 cp1250,latin1 "cp1250" will always be used
|
|
|
2381 If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified.
|
|
|
2382 See 'fileencoding' for the possible values.
|
|
|
2383 Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file
|
|
|
2384 is read.
|
|
|
2385
|
|
|
2386 *'fileformat'* *'ff'*
|
|
|
2387 'fileformat' 'ff' string (MS-DOS, MS-Windows, OS/2 default: "dos",
|
|
|
2388 Unix default: "unix",
|
|
|
2389 Macintosh default: "mac")
|
|
|
2390 local to buffer
|
|
|
2391 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2392 This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for
|
|
|
2393 reading/writing the buffer from/to a file:
|
|
|
2394 dos <CR> <NL>
|
|
|
2395 unix <NL>
|
|
|
2396 mac <CR>
|
|
|
2397 When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored.
|
|
|
2398 See |file-formats| and |file-read|.
|
|
|
2399 For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'.
|
|
|
2400 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O
|
|
|
2401 works like it was set to "unix'.
|
|
|
2402 This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and
|
|
|
2403 'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off.
|
|
|
2404 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
|
|
|
2405 option is set, because the file would be different when written.
|
|
|
2406 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
|
|
|
2407 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to "dos",
|
|
|
2408 'textmode' is set, otherwise 'textmode' is reset.
|
|
|
2409
|
|
|
2410 *'fileformats'* *'ffs'*
|
|
|
2411 'fileformats' 'ffs' string (default:
|
|
|
2412 Vim+Vi MS-DOS, MS-Windows OS/2: "dos,unix",
|
|
|
2413 Vim Unix: "unix,dos",
|
|
|
2414 Vim Mac: "mac,unix,dos",
|
|
|
2415 Vi Cygwin: "unix,dos",
|
|
|
2416 Vi others: "")
|
|
|
2417 global
|
|
|
2418 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2419 This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when
|
|
|
2420 starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing
|
|
|
2421 buffer:
|
|
|
2422 - When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used
|
|
|
2423 always. It is not set automatically.
|
|
|
2424 - When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer
|
|
10
|
2425 is opened. 'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer. The
|
|
7
|
2426 'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing
|
|
|
2427 buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to.
|
|
|
2428 - When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic
|
|
|
2429 <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file. When starting to
|
|
|
2430 edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>:
|
|
|
2431 1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos",
|
|
|
2432 'fileformat' is set to "dos".
|
|
|
2433 2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat'
|
|
10
|
2434 is set to "unix". Note that when a <NL> is found without a
|
|
7
|
2435 preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos".
|
|
|
2436 3. If 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
|
|
|
2437 This means that "mac" is only chosen when "unix" is not present,
|
|
|
2438 or when no <NL> is found in the file, and when "dos" is not
|
|
|
2439 present, or no <CR><NL> is present in the file.
|
|
|
2440 Also if "unix" was first chosen, but the first <CR> is before
|
|
|
2441 the first <NL> and there appears to be more <CR>'s than <NL>'s in
|
|
|
2442 the file, then 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
|
|
|
2443 4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from
|
|
|
2444 'fileformats' is used.
|
|
|
2445 When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but
|
|
|
2446 this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that
|
|
|
2447 file only, the option is not changed.
|
|
|
2448 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.
|
|
|
2449
|
|
|
2450 For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that
|
|
|
2451 are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be
|
|
|
2452 done:
|
|
|
2453 - When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection. Dos
|
|
|
2454 format will be used.
|
|
|
2455 - When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection
|
|
|
2456 is done. This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a
|
|
|
2457 <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is
|
|
|
2458 used.
|
|
|
2459 Also see |file-formats|.
|
|
|
2460 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to an empty
|
|
|
2461 string or one format (no comma is included), 'textauto' is reset,
|
|
|
2462 otherwise 'textauto' is set.
|
|
|
2463 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
2464 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
2465
|
|
|
2466 *'filetype'* *'ft'*
|
|
|
2467 'filetype' 'ft' string (default: "")
|
|
|
2468 local to buffer
|
|
|
2469 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2470 {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
|
|
|
2471 feature}
|
|
|
2472 When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered.
|
|
|
2473 All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be
|
|
|
2474 executed. Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file
|
|
|
2475 name.
|
|
|
2476 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type.
|
|
|
2477 This option is normally set when the file type is detected. To enable
|
|
|
2478 this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype|
|
|
|
2479 Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline,
|
|
|
2480 for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized.
|
|
|
2481 Example, for in an IDL file: >
|
|
|
2482 /* vim: set filetype=idl : */
|
|
|
2483 < |FileType| |filetypes|
|
|
|
2484 Do not confuse this option with 'osfiletype', which is for the file
|
|
|
2485 type that is actually stored with the file.
|
|
|
2486 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
|
|
|
2487 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
|
|
36
|
2488 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
|
|
7
|
2489
|
|
|
2490 *'fillchars'* *'fcs'*
|
|
|
2491 'fillchars' 'fcs' string (default "vert:|,fold:-")
|
|
|
2492 global
|
|
|
2493 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2494 {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
|
|
|
2495 and |+folding| features}
|
|
|
2496 Characters to fill the statuslines and vertical separators.
|
|
|
2497 It is a comma separated list of items:
|
|
|
2498
|
|
|
2499 item default Used for ~
|
|
|
2500 stl:c ' ' or '^' statusline of the current window
|
|
|
2501 stlnc:c ' ' or '-' statusline of the non-current windows
|
|
|
2502 vert:c '|' vertical separators |:vsplit|
|
|
|
2503 fold:c '-' filling 'foldtext'
|
|
|
2504 diff:c '-' deleted lines of the 'diff' option
|
|
|
2505
|
|
10
|
2506 Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default. For "stl" and
|
|
7
|
2507 "stlnc" the space will be used when there is highlighting, '^' or '-'
|
|
|
2508 otherwise.
|
|
|
2509
|
|
|
2510 Example: >
|
|
|
2511 :set fillchars=stl:^,stlnc:-,vert:\|,fold:-,diff:-
|
|
|
2512 < This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also
|
|
|
2513 be used when there is highlighting.
|
|
|
2514
|
|
|
2515 The highlighting used for these items:
|
|
|
2516 item highlight group ~
|
|
|
2517 stl:c StatusLine |hl-StatusLine|
|
|
|
2518 stlnc:c StatusLineNC |hl-StatusLineNC|
|
|
|
2519 vert:c VertSplit |hl-VertSplit|
|
|
|
2520 fold:c Folded |hl-Folded|
|
|
|
2521 diff:c DiffDelete |hl-DiffDelete|
|
|
|
2522
|
|
|
2523 *'fkmap'* *'fk'* *'nofkmap'* *'nofk'*
|
|
|
2524 'fkmap' 'fk' boolean (default off) *E198*
|
|
|
2525 global
|
|
|
2526 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2527 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
|
2528 feature}
|
|
|
2529 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Farsi character set.
|
|
|
2530 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
|
|
10
|
2531 toggle this option |i_CTRL-_|. See |farsi.txt|.
|
|
7
|
2532
|
|
|
2533 *'foldclose'* *'fcl'*
|
|
|
2534 'foldclose' 'fcl' string (default "")
|
|
|
2535 global
|
|
|
2536 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2537 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
2538 feature}
|
|
|
2539 When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and
|
|
|
2540 its level is higher than 'foldlevel'. Useful if you want folds to
|
|
|
2541 automatically close when moving out of them.
|
|
|
2542
|
|
|
2543 *'foldcolumn'* *'fdc'*
|
|
|
2544 'foldcolumn' 'fdc' number (default 0)
|
|
|
2545 local to window
|
|
|
2546 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2547 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
2548 feature}
|
|
|
2549 When non-zero, a column with the specified width is shown at the side
|
|
|
2550 of the window which indicates open and closed folds. The maximum
|
|
|
2551 value is 12.
|
|
|
2552 See |folding|.
|
|
|
2553
|
|
|
2554 *'foldenable'* *'fen'* *'nofoldenable'* *'nofen'*
|
|
|
2555 'foldenable' 'fen' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
2556 local to window
|
|
|
2557 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2558 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
2559 feature}
|
|
|
2560 When off, all folds are open. This option can be used to quickly
|
|
|
2561 switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with
|
|
|
2562 folds (including manually opened or closed folds). It can be toggled
|
|
10
|
2563 with the |zi| command. The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when
|
|
7
|
2564 'foldenable' is off.
|
|
|
2565 This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold.
|
|
|
2566 See |folding|.
|
|
|
2567
|
|
|
2568 *'foldexpr'* *'fde'*
|
|
|
2569 'foldexpr' 'fde' string (default: "0")
|
|
|
2570 local to window
|
|
|
2571 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2572 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
2573 or |+eval| feature}
|
|
|
2574 The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr". It is evaluated
|
|
|
2575 for each line to obtain its fold level. See |fold-expr|. Also see
|
|
|
2576 |eval-sandbox|.
|
|
|
2577
|
|
|
2578 *'foldignore'* *'fdi'*
|
|
|
2579 'foldignore' 'fdi' string (default: "#")
|
|
|
2580 local to window
|
|
|
2581 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2582 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
2583 feature}
|
|
|
2584 Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent". Lines starting with
|
|
|
2585 characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding
|
|
10
|
2586 lines. White space is skipped before checking for this character.
|
|
7
|
2587 The default "#" works well for C programs. See |fold-indent|.
|
|
|
2588
|
|
|
2589 *'foldlevel'* *'fdl'*
|
|
|
2590 'foldlevel' 'fdl' number (default: 0)
|
|
|
2591 local to window
|
|
|
2592 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2593 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
2594 feature}
|
|
|
2595 Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed.
|
|
|
2596 Setting this option to zero will close all folds. Higher numbers will
|
|
|
2597 close fewer folds.
|
|
|
2598 This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|.
|
|
|
2599 See |fold-foldlevel|.
|
|
|
2600
|
|
|
2601 *'foldlevelstart'* *'fdls'*
|
|
|
2602 'foldlevelstart' 'fdls' number (default: -1)
|
|
|
2603 global
|
|
|
2604 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2605 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
2606 feature}
|
|
|
2607 Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window.
|
|
|
2608 Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero),
|
|
|
2609 some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99).
|
|
|
2610 This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline
|
|
10
|
2611 overrules this option. Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also
|
|
7
|
2612 ignores this option and closes all folds.
|
|
|
2613 It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to
|
|
|
2614 overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files.
|
|
|
2615 When the value is negative, it is not used.
|
|
|
2616
|
|
|
2617 *'foldmarker'* *'fmr'* *E536*
|
|
|
2618 'foldmarker' 'fmr' string (default: "{{{,}}}")
|
|
|
2619 local to window
|
|
|
2620 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2621 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
2622 feature}
|
|
|
2623 The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker". There
|
|
|
2624 must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker. The
|
|
|
2625 marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow).
|
|
|
2626 See |fold-marker|.
|
|
|
2627
|
|
|
2628 *'foldmethod'* *'fdm'*
|
|
|
2629 'foldmethod' 'fdm' string (default: "manual")
|
|
|
2630 local to window
|
|
|
2631 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2632 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
2633 feature}
|
|
|
2634 The kind of folding used for the current window. Possible values:
|
|
|
2635 |fold-manual| manual Folds are created manually.
|
|
|
2636 |fold-indent| indent Lines with equal indent form a fold.
|
|
|
2637 |fold-expr| expr 'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line.
|
|
|
2638 |fold-marker| marker Markers are used to specify folds.
|
|
|
2639 |fold-syntax| syntax Syntax highlighting items specify folds.
|
|
|
2640 |fold-diff| diff Fold text that is not changed.
|
|
|
2641
|
|
|
2642 *'foldminlines'* *'fml'*
|
|
|
2643 'foldminlines' 'fml' number (default: 1)
|
|
|
2644 local to window
|
|
|
2645 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2646 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
2647 feature}
|
|
|
2648 Sets the minimum number of screen lines for a fold to be displayed
|
|
|
2649 closed. Also for manually closed folds.
|
|
|
2650 Note that this only has an effect of what is displayed. After using
|
|
|
2651 "zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller
|
|
|
2652 than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold.
|
|
|
2653
|
|
|
2654 *'foldnestmax'* *'fdn'*
|
|
|
2655 'foldnestmax' 'fdn' number (default: 20)
|
|
|
2656 local to window
|
|
|
2657 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2658 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
2659 feature}
|
|
|
2660 Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax"
|
|
|
2661 methods. This avoids that too many folds will be created. Using more
|
|
|
2662 than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20.
|
|
|
2663
|
|
|
2664 *'foldopen'* *'fdo'*
|
|
|
2665 'foldopen' 'fdo' string (default: "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix,
|
|
|
2666 search,tag,undo")
|
|
|
2667 global
|
|
|
2668 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2669 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
2670 feature}
|
|
|
2671 Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the
|
|
|
2672 command moves the cursor into a closed fold. It is a comma separated
|
|
|
2673 list of items.
|
|
|
2674 item commands ~
|
|
|
2675 all any
|
|
|
2676 block "(", "{", "[[", "[{", etc.
|
|
|
2677 hor horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc.
|
|
|
2678 insert any command in Insert mode
|
|
|
2679 jump far jumps: "G", "gg", etc.
|
|
|
2680 mark jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc.
|
|
|
2681 percent "%"
|
|
|
2682 quickfix ":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc.
|
|
|
2683 search search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc.
|
|
|
2684 (not for a search pattern in a ":" command)
|
|
|
2685 tag jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc.
|
|
|
2686 undo undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R
|
|
10
|
2687 When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used. Add
|
|
7
|
2688 the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect.
|
|
|
2689 When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%")
|
|
|
2690 this option is not used. This means the operator will include the
|
|
|
2691 whole closed fold.
|
|
|
2692 Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it
|
|
|
2693 very difficult to move onto a closed fold.
|
|
|
2694 In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open
|
|
|
2695 when text is inserted.
|
|
|
2696 To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or
|
|
|
2697 set the 'foldclose' option to "all".
|
|
|
2698
|
|
|
2699 *'foldtext'* *'fdt'*
|
|
|
2700 'foldtext' 'fdt' string (default: "foldtext()")
|
|
|
2701 local to window
|
|
|
2702 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2703 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
|
2704 feature}
|
|
|
2705 An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
|
|
|
2706 fold. See |fold-foldtext|.
|
|
|
2707
|
|
|
2708 *'formatoptions'* *'fo'*
|
|
|
2709 'formatoptions' 'fo' string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt")
|
|
|
2710 local to buffer
|
|
|
2711 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2712 This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic
|
|
|
2713 formatting is to be done. See |fo-table|. When the 'paste' option is
|
|
|
2714 on, no formatting is done (like 'formatoptions' is empty). Commas can
|
|
|
2715 be inserted for readability.
|
|
|
2716 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
|
|
|
2717 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
|
|
|
2718 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
2719 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
2720
|
|
|
2721 *'formatprg'* *'fp'*
|
|
|
2722 'formatprg' 'fp' string (default "")
|
|
|
2723 global
|
|
|
2724 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2725 The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines
|
|
|
2726 selected with the "gq" command. The program must take the input on
|
|
|
2727 stdin and produce the output on stdout. The Unix program "fmt" is
|
|
|
2728 such a program. If this option is an empty string, the internal
|
|
|
2729 format function will be used |C-indenting|. Environment variables are
|
|
|
2730 expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces
|
|
|
2731 and backslashes.
|
|
|
2732 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
2733 security reasons.
|
|
|
2734
|
|
36
|
2735 *'fsync'* *'fs'*
|
|
|
2736 'fsync' 'fs' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
2737 global
|
|
|
2738 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2739 When on, the library function fsync() will be called after writing a
|
|
|
2740 file. This will flush a file to disk, ensuring that it is safely
|
|
|
2741 written even on filesystems which do metadata-only journaling. This
|
|
|
2742 will force the harddrive to spin up on Linux systems running in laptop
|
|
|
2743 mode, so it may be undesirable in some situations. Be warned that
|
|
|
2744 turning this off increases the chances of data loss after a crash. On
|
|
|
2745 systems without an fsync() implementation, this variable is always
|
|
|
2746 off.
|
|
|
2747 Also see 'swapsync' for controlling fsync() on swap files.
|
|
|
2748
|
|
7
|
2749 *'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'*
|
|
|
2750 'gdefault' 'gd' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
2751 global
|
|
|
2752 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2753 When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on. This means that
|
|
|
2754 all matches in a line are substituted instead of one. When a 'g' flag
|
|
|
2755 is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution
|
|
|
2756 of all or one match. See |complex-change|.
|
|
|
2757
|
|
|
2758 command 'gdefault' on 'gdefault' off ~
|
|
|
2759 :s/// subst. all subst. one
|
|
|
2760 :s///g subst. one subst. all
|
|
|
2761 :s///gg subst. all subst. one
|
|
|
2762
|
|
|
2763 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
2764
|
|
|
2765 *'grepformat'* *'gfm'*
|
|
|
2766 'grepformat' 'gfm' string (default "%f:%l%m,%f %l%m")
|
|
|
2767 global
|
|
|
2768 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2769 Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output.
|
|
|
2770 This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the
|
|
|
2771 'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|.
|
|
|
2772
|
|
|
2773 *'grepprg'* *'gp'*
|
|
|
2774 'grepprg' 'gp' string (default "grep -n ",
|
|
|
2775 Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null",
|
|
|
2776 Win32: "findstr /n" or "grep -n",
|
|
|
2777 VMS: "SEARCH/NUMBERS ")
|
|
|
2778 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
|
2779 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2780 Program to use for the ":grep" command. This option may contain '%'
|
|
|
2781 and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command-
|
|
|
2782 line. The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments
|
|
|
2783 will be included. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See
|
|
|
2784 |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
|
2785 When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep"
|
|
|
2786 also work well with a single file: >
|
|
|
2787 :set grepprg=grep\ -nH
|
|
|
2788 < See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there
|
|
|
2789 apply equally to 'grepprg'.
|
|
|
2790 For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found,
|
|
|
2791 otherwise it's "grep -n".
|
|
|
2792 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
2793 security reasons.
|
|
|
2794
|
|
|
2795 *'guicursor'* *'gcr'* *E545* *E546* *E548* *E549*
|
|
|
2796 'guicursor' 'gcr' string (default "n-v-c:block-Cursor/lCursor,
|
|
|
2797 ve:ver35-Cursor,
|
|
|
2798 o:hor50-Cursor,
|
|
|
2799 i-ci:ver25-Cursor/lCursor,
|
|
|
2800 r-cr:hor20-Cursor/lCursor,
|
|
|
2801 sm:block-Cursor
|
|
|
2802 -blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175",
|
|
|
2803 for MS-DOS and Win32 console:
|
|
|
2804 "n-v-c:block,o:hor50,i-ci:hor15,
|
|
|
2805 r-cr:hor30,sm:block")
|
|
|
2806 global
|
|
|
2807 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2808 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled, and
|
|
|
2809 for MS-DOS and Win32 console}
|
|
|
2810 This option tells Vim what the cursor should look like in different
|
|
10
|
2811 modes. It fully works in the GUI. In an MSDOS or Win32 console, only
|
|
7
|
2812 the height of the cursor can be changed. This can be done by
|
|
|
2813 specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or
|
|
|
2814 horizontal cursor.
|
|
36
|
2815 For a console the 't_SI' and 't_EI' escape sequences are used.
|
|
7
|
2816
|
|
10
|
2817 The option is a comma separated list of parts. Each part consist of a
|
|
7
|
2818 mode-list and an argument-list:
|
|
|
2819 mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,..
|
|
|
2820 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes:
|
|
|
2821 n Normal mode
|
|
|
2822 v Visual mode
|
|
|
2823 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
|
|
|
2824 if not specified)
|
|
|
2825 o Operator-pending mode
|
|
|
2826 i Insert mode
|
|
|
2827 r Replace mode
|
|
|
2828 c Command-line Normal (append) mode
|
|
|
2829 ci Command-line Insert mode
|
|
|
2830 cr Command-line Replace mode
|
|
|
2831 sm showmatch in Insert mode
|
|
|
2832 a all modes
|
|
|
2833 The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments:
|
|
|
2834 hor{N} horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height
|
|
|
2835 ver{N} vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width
|
|
|
2836 block block cursor, fills the whole character
|
|
|
2837 [only one of the above three should be present]
|
|
|
2838 blinkwait{N} *cursor-blinking*
|
|
|
2839 blinkon{N}
|
|
|
2840 blinkoff{N}
|
|
|
2841 blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before
|
|
|
2842 the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that
|
|
|
2843 the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the
|
|
|
2844 cursor is not shown. The times are in msec. When one
|
|
|
2845 of the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. The
|
|
|
2846 default is: "blinkwait700-blinkon400-blinkoff250".
|
|
|
2847 These numbers are used for a missing entry. This
|
|
|
2848 means that blinking is enabled by default. To switch
|
|
|
2849 blinking off you can use "blinkon0". The cursor only
|
|
|
2850 blinks when Vim is waiting for input, not while
|
|
|
2851 executing a command.
|
|
|
2852 To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see
|
|
|
2853 |xterm-blink|.
|
|
|
2854 {group-name}
|
|
|
2855 a highlight group name, that sets the color and font
|
|
|
2856 for the cursor
|
|
|
2857 {group-name}/{group-name}
|
|
|
2858 Two highlight group names, the first is used when
|
|
|
2859 no language mappings are used, the other when they
|
|
|
2860 are. |language-mapping|
|
|
|
2861
|
|
|
2862 Examples of parts:
|
|
|
2863 n-c-v:block-nCursor in Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a
|
|
|
2864 block cursor with colors from the "nCursor"
|
|
|
2865 highlight group
|
|
|
2866 i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150
|
|
|
2867 In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a
|
|
|
2868 30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the
|
|
|
2869 "iCursor" highlight group. Blink a bit
|
|
|
2870 faster.
|
|
|
2871
|
|
|
2872 The 'a' mode is different. It will set the given argument-list for
|
|
|
2873 all modes. It does not reset anything to defaults. This can be used
|
|
|
2874 to do a common setting for all modes. For example, to switch off
|
|
|
2875 blinking: "a:blinkon0"
|
|
|
2876
|
|
|
2877 Examples of cursor highlighting: >
|
|
|
2878 :highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE
|
|
|
2879 :highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg
|
|
|
2880 <
|
|
|
2881 *'guifont'* *'gfn'*
|
|
|
2882 *E235* *E596* *E610* *E611*
|
|
|
2883 'guifont' 'gfn' string (default "")
|
|
|
2884 global
|
|
|
2885 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2886 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
|
|
|
2887 This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim.
|
|
|
2888 In its simplest form the value is just one font name. When
|
|
|
2889 the font cannot be found you will get an error message. To try other
|
|
|
2890 font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas.
|
|
|
2891 The first valid font is used.
|
|
8
|
2892
|
|
7
|
2893 When 'guifontset' is not empty, 'guifont' is not used.
|
|
8
|
2894
|
|
7
|
2895 Spaces after a comma are ignored. To include a comma in a font name
|
|
|
2896 precede it with a backslash. Setting an option requires an extra
|
|
|
2897 backslash before a space and a backslash. See also
|
|
|
2898 |option-backslash|. For example: >
|
|
|
2899 :set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas
|
|
8
|
2900 < will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it
|
|
7
|
2901 will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead.
|
|
8
|
2902
|
|
|
2903 If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting.
|
|
|
2904 If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource
|
|
|
2905 settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it
|
|
|
2906 will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in
|
|
|
2907 the case of X). The font names given should be "normal" fonts. Vim
|
|
|
2908 will try to find the related bold and italic fonts.
|
|
|
2909
|
|
|
2910 For Win32, GTK and Photon only: >
|
|
|
2911 :set guifont=*
|
|
|
2912 < will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want.
|
|
|
2913
|
|
|
2914 The font name depends on the GUI used. See |setting-guifont| for a
|
|
|
2915 way to set 'guifont' for various systems.
|
|
|
2916
|
|
7
|
2917 For the GTK+ 2 GUI the font name looks like this: >
|
|
|
2918 :set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11
|
|
|
2919 < That's all. XLFDs are no longer accepted.
|
|
|
2920 *E236*
|
|
|
2921 Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same
|
|
8
|
2922 width). An exception is GTK 2: all fonts are accepted, but
|
|
|
2923 mono-spaced fonts look best.
|
|
|
2924
|
|
7
|
2925 To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel"
|
|
|
2926 program. The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts.
|
|
8
|
2927
|
|
7
|
2928 For the Win32 GUI *E244* *E245*
|
|
|
2929 - takes these options in the font name:
|
|
|
2930 hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point)
|
|
|
2931 wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point)
|
|
|
2932 b - bold
|
|
|
2933 i - italic
|
|
|
2934 u - underline
|
|
|
2935 s - strikeout
|
|
|
2936 cXX - character set XX. valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC,
|
|
|
2937 BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK,
|
|
|
2938 HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS,
|
|
|
2939 SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.
|
|
22
|
2940 Normally you would use "cDEFAULT".
|
|
7
|
2941
|
|
|
2942 Use a ':' to separate the options.
|
|
|
2943 - A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use
|
|
|
2944 backslashes to escape the spaces.
|
|
|
2945 - Examples: >
|
|
|
2946 :set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN
|
|
|
2947 :set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5
|
|
|
2948 < See also |font-sizes|.
|
|
|
2949
|
|
|
2950 *'guifontset'* *'gfs'*
|
|
|
2951 *E250* *E252* *E234* *E597* *E598*
|
|
|
2952 'guifontset' 'gfs' string (default "")
|
|
|
2953 global
|
|
|
2954 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2955 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and
|
|
|
2956 with the |+xfontset| feature}
|
|
|
2957 {not available in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
|
|
|
2958 When not empty, specifies two (or more) fonts to be used. The first
|
|
|
2959 one for normal English, the second one for your special language. See
|
|
|
2960 |xfontset|.
|
|
|
2961 Setting this option also means that all font names will be handled as
|
|
|
2962 a fontset name. Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the
|
|
|
2963 |:highlight| command.
|
|
|
2964 The fonts must match with the current locale. If fonts for the
|
|
|
2965 character sets that the current locale uses are not included, setting
|
|
|
2966 'guifontset' will fail.
|
|
|
2967 Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont'
|
|
|
2968 the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be
|
|
|
2969 used. In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name,
|
|
|
2970 including the commas. It is not possible to specify alternative
|
|
|
2971 fontset names.
|
|
|
2972 This example works on many X11 systems: >
|
|
|
2973 :set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-*
|
|
|
2974 <
|
|
|
2975 *'guifontwide'* *'gfw'* *E231* *E533* *E534*
|
|
|
2976 'guifontwide' 'gfw' string (default "")
|
|
|
2977 global
|
|
|
2978 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
2979 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
|
|
|
2980 When not empty, specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be used
|
|
|
2981 for double-width characters. The first font that can be loaded is
|
|
|
2982 used.
|
|
|
2983 Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one
|
|
|
2984 specified with 'guifont' and the same height.
|
|
|
2985
|
|
|
2986 All GUI versions but GTK+ 2:
|
|
|
2987
|
|
|
2988 'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and
|
|
|
2989 'guifontset' is empty or invalid.
|
|
|
2990 When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and
|
|
|
2991 'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching
|
|
|
2992 double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it.
|
|
|
2993
|
|
|
2994 GTK+ 2 GUI only: *guifontwide_gtk2*
|
|
|
2995
|
|
|
2996 If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width
|
|
|
2997 characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8".
|
|
|
2998 Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide'
|
|
10
|
2999 automatically. If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the
|
|
7
|
3000 font for characters not available in 'guifont'. Thus you do not need
|
|
|
3001 to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice
|
|
|
3002 made by Pango/Xft.
|
|
|
3003
|
|
|
3004 *'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'*
|
|
|
3005 'guiheadroom' 'ghr' number (default 50)
|
|
|
3006 global
|
|
|
3007 {not in Vi} {only for GTK and X11 GUI}
|
|
|
3008 The number of pixels subtracted from the screen height when fitting
|
|
|
3009 the GUI window on the screen. Set this before the GUI is started,
|
|
|
3010 e.g., in your |gvimrc| file. When zero, the whole screen height will
|
|
10
|
3011 be used by the window. When positive, the specified number of pixel
|
|
7
|
3012 lines will be left for window decorations and other items on the
|
|
|
3013 screen. Set it to a negative value to allow windows taller than the
|
|
|
3014 screen.
|
|
|
3015
|
|
|
3016 *'guioptions'* *'go'*
|
|
|
3017 'guioptions' 'go' string (default "gmrLtT" (MS-Windows),
|
|
|
3018 "agimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena)
|
|
|
3019 global
|
|
|
3020 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3021 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
|
|
8
|
3022 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim. It is a
|
|
7
|
3023 sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the
|
|
|
3024 GUI should be used.
|
|
|
3025 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
|
|
|
3026 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
|
|
|
3027
|
|
|
3028 Valid letters are as follows:
|
|
|
3029 *guioptions_a*
|
|
|
3030 'a' Autoselect: If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started,
|
|
|
3031 or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of
|
|
|
3032 the windowing system's global selection. This means that the
|
|
|
3033 Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other
|
|
|
3034 applications as well as into Vim itself. When the Visual mode
|
|
|
3035 ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an
|
|
|
3036 application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text
|
|
|
3037 is automatically yanked into the "* selection register.
|
|
|
3038 Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other
|
|
|
3039 applications after the VISUAL mode has ended.
|
|
|
3040 If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the
|
|
|
3041 windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to
|
|
|
3042 by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.
|
|
|
3043 The same applies to the modeless selection.
|
|
|
3044
|
|
10
|
3045 'A' Autoselect for the modeless selection. Like 'a', but only
|
|
7
|
3046 applies to the modeless selection.
|
|
|
3047
|
|
|
3048 'guioptions' autoselect Visual autoselect modeless ~
|
|
|
3049 "" - -
|
|
|
3050 "a" yes yes
|
|
|
3051 "A" - yes
|
|
|
3052 "aA" yes yes
|
|
|
3053
|
|
|
3054 'c' Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple
|
|
|
3055 choices.
|
|
|
3056
|
|
|
3057 'f' Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell
|
|
|
3058 where it was started. Use this for programs that wait for the
|
|
|
3059 editor to finish (e.g., an e-mail program). Alternatively you
|
|
|
3060 can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the
|
|
|
3061 foreground. |gui-fork|
|
|
|
3062 Note: Set this option in the vimrc file. The forking may have
|
|
|
3063 happened already when the gvimrc file is read.
|
|
|
3064
|
|
|
3065 'i' Use a Vim icon. For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper
|
|
|
3066 corner of the window. It's black&white on non-GTK, because of
|
|
|
3067 limitations of X11. For a color icon, see |X11-icon|.
|
|
|
3068
|
|
|
3069 'm' Menu bar is present.
|
|
10
|
3070 'M' The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced. Note
|
|
7
|
3071 that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before
|
|
|
3072 switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the .gvimrc
|
|
|
3073 file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the
|
|
|
3074 ":syntax on" and ":filetype on" commands load the menu too).
|
|
|
3075 'g' Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey. If
|
|
|
3076 'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all.
|
|
|
3077 Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items.
|
|
|
3078
|
|
|
3079 't' Include tearoff menu items. Currently only works for Win32,
|
|
|
3080 GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI.
|
|
|
3081 'T' Include Toolbar. Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, and
|
|
|
3082 Athena GUIs.
|
|
|
3083
|
|
|
3084 'r' Right-hand scrollbar is always present.
|
|
|
3085 'R' Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
|
|
|
3086 split window.
|
|
|
3087 'l' Left-hand scrollbar is always present.
|
|
|
3088 'L' Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
|
|
|
3089 split window.
|
|
|
3090 'b' Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present. Its size depends on
|
|
|
3091 the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h'
|
|
|
3092 flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll|
|
|
|
3093 'h' Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor
|
|
|
3094 line. Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll|
|
|
|
3095
|
|
|
3096 And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if
|
|
|
3097 you really want to :-). See |gui-scrollbars| for more information.
|
|
|
3098
|
|
|
3099 'v' Use a vertical button layout for dialogs. When not included,
|
|
|
3100 a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a
|
|
|
3101 vertical layout is used anyway.
|
|
|
3102 'p' Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI. This is required for some
|
|
|
3103 window managers. If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at
|
|
|
3104 the right moment, try adding this flag. This must be done
|
|
|
3105 before starting the GUI. Set it in your gvimrc. Adding or
|
|
|
3106 removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.
|
|
10
|
3107 'F' Add a footer. Only for Motif. See |gui-footer|.
|
|
7
|
3108
|
|
|
3109 *'guipty'* *'noguipty'*
|
|
|
3110 'guipty' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
3111 global
|
|
|
3112 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3113 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
|
|
|
3114 Only in the GUI: If on, an attempt is made to open a pseudo-tty for
|
|
|
3115 I/O to/from shell commands. See |gui-pty|.
|
|
|
3116
|
|
|
3117 *'helpfile'* *'hf'*
|
|
|
3118 'helpfile' 'hf' string (default (MSDOS) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt"
|
|
|
3119 (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt")
|
|
|
3120 global
|
|
|
3121 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3122 Name of the main help file. All distributed help files should be
|
|
|
3123 placed together in one directory. Additionally, all "doc" directories
|
|
|
3124 in 'runtimepath' will be used.
|
|
|
3125 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. For example:
|
|
|
3126 "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt". If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also
|
|
10
|
3127 tried. Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including
|
|
7
|
3128 spaces and backslashes.
|
|
|
3129 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
3130 security reasons.
|
|
|
3131
|
|
|
3132 *'helpheight'* *'hh'*
|
|
|
3133 'helpheight' 'hh' number (default 20)
|
|
|
3134 global
|
|
|
3135 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3136 {not available when compiled without the +windows
|
|
|
3137 feature}
|
|
|
3138 Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the
|
|
|
3139 ":help" command. The initial height of the help window is half of the
|
|
|
3140 current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other
|
|
|
3141 windows. When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is
|
|
|
3142 set to 'helpheight'. Set to zero to disable.
|
|
|
3143
|
|
|
3144 *'helplang'* *'hlg'*
|
|
|
3145 'helplang' 'hlg' string (default: messages language or empty)
|
|
|
3146 global
|
|
|
3147 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang|
|
|
|
3148 feature}
|
|
|
3149 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3150 Comma separated list of languages. Vim will use the first language
|
|
|
3151 for which the desired help can be found. The English help will always
|
|
|
3152 be used as a last resort. You can add "en" to prefer English over
|
|
|
3153 another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that
|
|
|
3154 language and not in the English help.
|
|
|
3155 Example: >
|
|
|
3156 :set helplang=de,it
|
|
|
3157 < This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help
|
|
|
3158 files.
|
|
|
3159 When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will
|
|
|
3160 try to find the tag in the current language before using this option.
|
|
|
3161 See |help-translated|.
|
|
|
3162
|
|
|
3163 *'hidden'* *'hid'* *'nohidden'* *'nohid'*
|
|
|
3164 'hidden' 'hid' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
3165 global
|
|
|
3166 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3167 When off a buffer is unloaded when it is |abandon|ed. When on a
|
|
|
3168 buffer becomes hidden when it is |abandon|ed. If the buffer is still
|
|
|
3169 displayed in another window, it does not become hidden, of course.
|
|
|
3170 The commands that move through the buffer list sometimes make a buffer
|
|
|
3171 hidden although the 'hidden' option is off: When the buffer is
|
|
|
3172 modified, 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible, and the '!'
|
|
10
|
3173 flag was used. See also |windows.txt|.
|
|
12
|
3174 To only make one buffer hidden use the 'bufhidden' option.
|
|
7
|
3175 This option is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|.
|
|
|
3176 WARNING: It's easy to forget that you have changes in hidden buffers.
|
|
|
3177 Think twice when using ":q!" or ":qa!".
|
|
|
3178
|
|
|
3179 *'highlight'* *'hl'*
|
|
|
3180 'highlight' 'hl' string (default (as a single string):
|
|
|
3181 "8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory,
|
|
|
3182 e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg,
|
|
|
3183 M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,r:Question,
|
|
|
3184 s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit
|
|
|
3185 t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
|
|
|
3186 f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,
|
|
|
3187 C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,
|
|
|
3188 >:SignColumn")
|
|
|
3189 global
|
|
|
3190 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3191 This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various
|
|
|
3192 occasions. It is a comma separated list of character pairs. The
|
|
|
3193 first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to
|
|
10
|
3194 use for that occasion. The occasions are:
|
|
7
|
3195 |hl-SpecialKey| 8 Meta and special keys listed with ":map"
|
|
|
3196 |hl-NonText| @ '~' and '@' at the end of the window and
|
|
|
3197 characters from 'showbreak'
|
|
|
3198 |hl-Directory| d directories in CTRL-D listing and other special
|
|
|
3199 things in listings
|
|
|
3200 |hl-ErrorMsg| e error messages
|
|
|
3201 h (obsolete, ignored)
|
|
|
3202 |hl-IncSearch| i 'incsearch' highlighting
|
|
|
3203 |hl-Search| l last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch')
|
|
|
3204 |hl-MoreMsg| m |more-prompt|
|
|
|
3205 |hl-ModeMsg| M Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
|
|
|
3206 |hl-LineNr| n line number for ":number" and ":#" commands
|
|
|
3207 |hl-Question| r |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
|
|
|
3208 |hl-StatusLine| s status line of current window |status-line|
|
|
|
3209 |hl-StatusLineNC| S status lines of not-current windows
|
|
|
3210 |hl-Title| t Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
|
|
|
3211 |hl-VertSplit| c column used to separate vertically split windows
|
|
|
3212 |hl-Visual| v Visual mode
|
|
|
3213 |hl-VisualNOS| V Visual mode when Vim does is "Not Owning the
|
|
|
3214 Selection" Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and
|
|
|
3215 |xterm-clipboard|.
|
|
|
3216 |hl-WarningMsg| w warning messages
|
|
|
3217 |hl-WildMenu| W wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu'
|
|
|
3218 |hl-Folded| f line used for closed folds
|
|
|
3219 |hl-FoldColumn| F 'foldcolumn'
|
|
|
3220 |hl-SignColumn| > column used for |signs|
|
|
|
3221
|
|
|
3222 The display modes are:
|
|
|
3223 r reverse (termcap entry "mr" and "me")
|
|
|
3224 i italic (termcap entry "ZH" and "ZR")
|
|
|
3225 b bold (termcap entry "md" and "me")
|
|
|
3226 s standout (termcap entry "so" and "se")
|
|
|
3227 u underline (termcap entry "us" and "ue")
|
|
|
3228 n no highlighting
|
|
|
3229 - no highlighting
|
|
|
3230 : use a highlight group
|
|
|
3231 The default is used for occasions that are not included.
|
|
|
3232 If you want to change what the display modes do, see |dos-colors|
|
|
|
3233 for an example.
|
|
|
3234 When using the ':' display mode, this must be followed by the name of
|
|
|
3235 a highlight group. A highlight group can be used to define any type
|
|
|
3236 of highlighting, including using color. See |:highlight| on how to
|
|
|
3237 define one. The default uses a different group for each occasion.
|
|
|
3238 See |highlight-default| for the default highlight groups.
|
|
|
3239
|
|
|
3240 *'hlsearch'* *'hls'* *'nohlsearch'* *'nohls'*
|
|
|
3241 'hlsearch' 'hls' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
3242 global
|
|
|
3243 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3244 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
|
3245 |+extra_search| feature}
|
|
|
3246 When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches.
|
|
|
3247 The type of highlighting used can be set with the 'l' occasion in the
|
|
|
3248 'highlight' option. This uses the "Search" highlight group by
|
|
|
3249 default. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets
|
|
|
3250 are not applied.
|
|
|
3251 See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|.
|
|
|
3252 When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it
|
|
|
3253 off with |:nohlsearch|. As soon as you use a search command, the
|
|
|
3254 highlighting comes back.
|
|
|
3255 When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to
|
|
|
3256 highlight all of the matched text. However, this depends on where the
|
|
10
|
3257 search starts. This will be the first line in the window or the first
|
|
7
|
3258 line below a closed fold. A match in a previous line which is not
|
|
|
3259 drawn may not continue in an newly drawn line.
|
|
|
3260 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
3261
|
|
|
3262 *'history'* *'hi'*
|
|
|
3263 'history' 'hi' number (Vim default: 20, Vi default: 0)
|
|
|
3264 global
|
|
|
3265 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3266 A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns
|
|
|
3267 are remembered. This option decides how many entries may be stored in
|
|
|
3268 each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|).
|
|
|
3269 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
3270 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
3271
|
|
|
3272 *'hkmap'* *'hk'* *'nohkmap'* *'nohk'*
|
|
|
3273 'hkmap' 'hk' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
3274 global
|
|
|
3275 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3276 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
|
3277 feature}
|
|
|
3278 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Hebrew character set.
|
|
|
3279 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
|
|
|
3280 toggle this option. See |rileft.txt|.
|
|
|
3281 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
3282
|
|
|
3283 *'hkmapp'* *'hkp'* *'nohkmapp'* *'nohkp'*
|
|
|
3284 'hkmapp' 'hkp' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
3285 global
|
|
|
3286 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3287 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
|
3288 feature}
|
|
|
3289 When on, phonetic keyboard mapping is used. 'hkmap' must also be on.
|
|
|
3290 This is useful if you have a non-Hebrew keyboard.
|
|
|
3291 See |rileft.txt|.
|
|
|
3292 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
3293
|
|
|
3294 *'icon'* *'noicon'*
|
|
|
3295 'icon' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)
|
|
|
3296 global
|
|
|
3297 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3298 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
|
|
3299 feature}
|
|
|
3300 When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of
|
|
|
3301 'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file
|
|
|
3302 currently being edited. Only the last part of the name is used.
|
|
|
3303 Overridden by the 'iconstring' option.
|
|
|
3304 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons (currently
|
|
|
3305 only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option - these are
|
|
|
3306 Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_IS' is taken from the
|
|
|
3307 builtin termcap).
|
|
|
3308 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
|
|
|
3309 restored if possible |X11|. See |X11-icon| for changing the icon on
|
|
|
3310 X11.
|
|
|
3311
|
|
|
3312 *'iconstring'*
|
|
|
3313 'iconstring' string (default "")
|
|
|
3314 global
|
|
|
3315 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3316 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
|
|
3317 feature}
|
|
|
3318 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of
|
|
|
3319 the window. This happens only when the 'icon' option is on.
|
|
|
3320 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text
|
|
|
3321 (currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option).
|
|
|
3322 Does not work for MS Windows.
|
|
|
3323 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
|
|
|
3324 restored if possible |X11|.
|
|
|
3325 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
|
|
10
|
3326 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. See
|
|
7
|
3327 'titlestring' for example settings.
|
|
|
3328 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}
|
|
|
3329
|
|
|
3330 *'ignorecase'* *'ic'* *'noignorecase'* *'noic'*
|
|
|
3331 'ignorecase' 'ic' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
3332 global
|
|
|
3333 Ignore case in search patterns. Also used when searching in the tags
|
|
|
3334 file.
|
|
|
3335 Also see 'smartcase'.
|
|
|
3336 Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see
|
|
|
3337 |/ignorecase|.
|
|
|
3338
|
|
|
3339 *'imactivatekey'* *'imak'*
|
|
|
3340 'imactivatekey' 'imak' string (default "")
|
|
|
3341 global
|
|
|
3342 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3343 {only available when compiled with |+xim| and
|
|
|
3344 |+GUI_GTK|}
|
|
|
3345 Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for
|
|
|
3346 activation. When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control
|
|
|
3347 IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'.
|
|
|
3348 You can't use this option to change the activation key, the option
|
|
|
3349 tells Vim what the key is.
|
|
|
3350 Format:
|
|
|
3351 [MODIFIER_FLAG-]KEY_STRING
|
|
|
3352
|
|
|
3353 These characters can be used for MODIFIER_FLAG (case is ignored):
|
|
|
3354 S Shift key
|
|
|
3355 L Lock key
|
|
|
3356 C Control key
|
|
|
3357 1 Mod1 key
|
|
|
3358 2 Mod2 key
|
|
|
3359 3 Mod3 key
|
|
|
3360 4 Mod4 key
|
|
|
3361 5 Mod5 key
|
|
|
3362 Combinations are allowed, for example "S-C-space" or "SC-space" are
|
|
|
3363 both shift+ctrl+space.
|
|
|
3364 See <X11/keysymdef.h> and XStringToKeysym for KEY_STRING.
|
|
|
3365
|
|
|
3366 Example: >
|
|
|
3367 :set imactivatekey=S-space
|
|
|
3368 < "S-space" means shift+space. This is the activation key for kinput2 +
|
|
|
3369 canna (Japanese), and ami (Korean).
|
|
|
3370
|
|
|
3371 *'imcmdline'* *'imc'* *'noimcmdline'* *'noimc'*
|
|
|
3372 'imcmdline' 'imc' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
3373 global
|
|
|
3374 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3375 {only available when compiled with the |+xim|
|
|
|
3376 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
|
|
|
3377 When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command
|
|
|
3378 line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that).
|
|
|
3379 Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering
|
|
|
3380 English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented
|
|
|
3381 characters with dead keys.
|
|
|
3382
|
|
|
3383 *'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'nodisable'* *'noimd'*
|
|
|
3384 'imdisable' 'imd' boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI))
|
|
|
3385 global
|
|
|
3386 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3387 {only available when compiled with the |+xim|
|
|
|
3388 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
|
|
|
3389 When set the Input Method is never used. This is useful to disable
|
|
|
3390 the IM when it doesn't work properly.
|
|
|
3391 Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines. This
|
|
|
3392 may change in later releases.
|
|
|
3393
|
|
|
3394 *'iminsert'* *'imi'*
|
|
|
3395 'iminsert' 'imi' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
|
|
|
3396 local to buffer
|
|
|
3397 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3398 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in
|
|
|
3399 Insert mode. Valid values:
|
|
|
3400 0 :lmap is off and IM is off
|
|
|
3401 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off
|
|
|
3402 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON
|
|
|
3403 2 is available only when compiled with the |+multi_byte_ime|, |+xim|
|
|
|
3404 or |global-ime|.
|
|
|
3405 To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc>
|
|
|
3406 this can be used: >
|
|
|
3407 :inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR>
|
|
|
3408 < This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert
|
|
|
3409 mode.
|
|
|
3410 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode
|
|
|
3411 |i_CTRL-^|.
|
|
|
3412 The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name.
|
|
|
3413 It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f".
|
|
|
3414 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
|
|
|
3415 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
|
|
|
3416
|
|
|
3417 *'imsearch'* *'ims'*
|
|
|
3418 'imsearch' 'ims' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
|
|
|
3419 local to buffer
|
|
|
3420 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3421 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when
|
|
|
3422 entering a search pattern. Valid values:
|
|
|
3423 -1 the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like
|
|
|
3424 'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern
|
|
|
3425 0 :lmap is off and IM is off
|
|
|
3426 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off
|
|
|
3427 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON
|
|
|
3428 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode
|
|
|
3429 |c_CTRL-^|.
|
|
|
3430 The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap'
|
|
|
3431 option to a valid keymap name.
|
|
|
3432 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
|
|
|
3433 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
|
|
|
3434
|
|
|
3435 *'include'* *'inc'*
|
|
|
3436 'include' 'inc' string (default "^\s*#\s*include")
|
|
|
3437 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
|
3438 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3439 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
|
3440 |+find_in_path| feature}
|
|
10
|
3441 Pattern to be used to find an include command. It is a search
|
|
7
|
3442 pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|). The default
|
|
|
3443 value is for C programs. This option is used for the commands "[i",
|
|
|
3444 "]I", "[d", etc.. The 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file
|
|
|
3445 name that comes after the matched pattern. See |option-backslash|
|
|
|
3446 about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
|
3447
|
|
|
3448 *'includeexpr'* *'inex'*
|
|
|
3449 'includeexpr' 'inex' string (default "")
|
|
|
3450 local to buffer
|
|
|
3451 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3452 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
|
3453 |+find_in_path| or |+eval| feature}
|
|
|
3454 Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include'
|
|
10
|
3455 option to a file name. Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: >
|
|
7
|
3456 :set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')
|
|
|
3457 < The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected.
|
|
|
3458 Evaluated in the |sandbox|.
|
|
|
3459 Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be
|
|
10
|
3460 found. Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
|
|
7
|
3461 Also used for |<cfile>|.
|
|
|
3462
|
|
|
3463 *'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'*
|
|
|
3464 'incsearch' 'is' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
3465 global
|
|
|
3466 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3467 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
|
3468 |+extra_search| feature}
|
|
17
|
3469 While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed
|
|
|
3470 so far, matches. The matched string is highlighted. If the pattern
|
|
|
3471 is invalid or not found, nothing is shown. The screen will be updated
|
|
|
3472 often, this is only useful on fast terminals.
|
|
|
3473 Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its
|
|
|
3474 original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>. You
|
|
|
3475 still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the
|
|
|
3476 cursor to the match.
|
|
|
3477 The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in 'highlight'.
|
|
|
3478 See also: 'hlsearch'.
|
|
7
|
3479 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
3480
|
|
|
3481 *'indentexpr'* *'inde'*
|
|
|
3482 'indentexpr' 'inde' string (default "")
|
|
|
3483 local to buffer
|
|
|
3484 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3485 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
|
|
3486 or |+eval| features}
|
|
|
3487 Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line.
|
|
|
3488 It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and
|
|
|
3489 in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option.
|
|
|
3490 When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and
|
|
|
3491 'smartindent' indenting.
|
|
|
3492 When 'paste' is set this option is not used for indenting.
|
|
|
3493 The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for
|
|
|
3494 which the indent is to be computed. The cursor is also as this line
|
|
|
3495 when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around).
|
|
|
3496 The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent. It
|
|
|
3497 can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is
|
|
|
3498 used for the indent).
|
|
|
3499 Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()|
|
|
|
3500 and |lispindent()|.
|
|
|
3501 The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! It must
|
|
|
3502 not change the text, jump to another window, etc. Afterwards the
|
|
|
3503 cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved.
|
|
|
3504 Normally this option would be set to call a function: >
|
|
|
3505 :set indentexpr=GetMyIndent()
|
|
|
3506 < Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains
|
|
|
3507 "msg".
|
|
|
3508 See |indent-expression|. Also see |eval-sandbox|.
|
|
|
3509 NOTE: This option is made empty when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
3510
|
|
|
3511 *'indentkeys'* *'indk'*
|
|
|
3512 'indentkeys' 'indk' string (default "0{,0},:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
|
|
|
3513 local to buffer
|
|
|
3514 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3515 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
|
|
3516 feature}
|
|
|
3517 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
|
|
|
3518 the current line. Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty.
|
|
|
3519 The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|.
|
|
|
3520 See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|.
|
|
|
3521
|
|
|
3522 *'infercase'* *'inf'* *'noinfercase'* *'noinf'*
|
|
|
3523 'infercase' 'inf' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
3524 local to buffer
|
|
|
3525 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3526 When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and
|
|
|
3527 'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted. If the
|
|
|
3528 typed text contains a lowercase letter where the match has an upper
|
|
|
3529 case letter, the completed part is made lowercase. If the typed text
|
|
|
3530 has no lowercase letters and the match has a lowercase letter where
|
|
|
3531 the typed text has an uppercase letter, and there is a letter before
|
|
|
3532 it, the completed part is made uppercase.
|
|
|
3533
|
|
|
3534 *'insertmode'* *'im'* *'noinsertmode'* *'noim'*
|
|
|
3535 'insertmode' 'im' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
3536 global
|
|
|
3537 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3538 Makes Vim work in a way that Insert mode is the default mode. Useful
|
|
|
3539 if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor. Used for |evim|.
|
|
|
3540 These Insert mode commands will be useful:
|
|
|
3541 - Use the cursor keys to move around.
|
|
|
3542 - Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|). When
|
|
|
3543 this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off.
|
|
|
3544 Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished.
|
|
|
3545 *i_CTRL-L*
|
|
|
3546 - Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use
|
|
|
3547 <Esc> to get back to Insert mode.
|
|
|
3548
|
|
|
3549 These items change when 'insertmode' is set:
|
|
|
3550 - when starting to edit of a file, Vim goes to Insert mode.
|
|
|
3551 - <Esc> in Insert mode is a no-op and beeps.
|
|
|
3552 - <Esc> in Normal mode makes Vim go to Insert mode.
|
|
|
3553 - CTRL-L in Insert mode is a command, it is not inserted.
|
|
|
3554 - CTRL-Z in Insert mode suspends Vim, see |CTRL-Z|. *i_CTRL-Z*
|
|
|
3555 However, when <Esc> is used inside a mapping, it behaves like
|
|
|
3556 'insertmode' was not set. This was done to be able to use the same
|
|
|
3557 mappings with 'insertmode' set or not set.
|
|
|
3558 When executing commands with |:normal| 'insertmode' is not used.
|
|
|
3559
|
|
|
3560 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
3561
|
|
|
3562 *'isfname'* *'isf'*
|
|
|
3563 'isfname' 'isf' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
|
|
|
3564 "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,="
|
|
|
3565 for AMIGA: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,$,:"
|
|
|
3566 for VMS: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,<,>,[,],:,;,~"
|
|
|
3567 for OS/390: "@,240-249,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,="
|
|
|
3568 otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=")
|
|
|
3569 global
|
|
|
3570 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3571 The characters specified by this option are included in file names and
|
|
|
3572 path names. Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in
|
|
10
|
3573 the tags file. It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|.
|
|
7
|
3574 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
|
|
|
3575 characters up to 255 are specified with this option.
|
|
|
3576 For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well.
|
|
|
3577
|
|
|
3578 Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to
|
|
|
3579 do its best to make it work as you would expect. That is a bit
|
|
|
3580 tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special
|
|
|
3581 characters. Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file
|
|
|
3582 name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes. The
|
|
|
3583 '&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for
|
|
|
3584 cmd.exe.
|
|
|
3585
|
|
|
3586 The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas.
|
|
10
|
3587 Each part can be a single character number or a range. A range is two
|
|
|
3588 character numbers with '-' in between. A character number can be a
|
|
7
|
3589 decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does
|
|
|
3590 not work for digits). Example:
|
|
|
3591 "_,-,128-140,#-43" (include '_' and '-' and the range
|
|
|
3592 128 to 140 and '#' to 43)
|
|
|
3593 If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range
|
|
|
3594 will be excluded from the option. The option is interpreted from left
|
|
|
3595 to right. Put the excluded character after the range where it is
|
|
|
3596 included. To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the
|
|
|
3597 option or the end of a range. Example:
|
|
|
3598 "^a-z,#,^" (exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^')
|
|
|
3599 If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE
|
|
|
3600 are included. Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z,
|
|
|
3601 plus accented characters. To include '@' itself use "@-@". Examples:
|
|
|
3602 "@,^a-z" All alphabetic characters, excluding lower
|
|
|
3603 case letters.
|
|
|
3604 "a-z,A-Z,@-@" All letters plus the '@' character.
|
|
|
3605 A comma can be included by using it where a character number is
|
|
|
3606 expected. Example:
|
|
|
3607 "48-57,,,_" Digits, comma and underscore.
|
|
|
3608 A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'. Example:
|
|
|
3609 " -~,^,,9" All characters from space to '~', excluding
|
|
|
3610 comma, plus <Tab>.
|
|
|
3611 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
|
3612
|
|
|
3613 *'isident'* *'isi'*
|
|
|
3614 'isident' 'isi' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
|
|
|
3615 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
|
|
|
3616 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255")
|
|
|
3617 global
|
|
|
3618 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3619 The characters given by this option are included in identifiers.
|
|
|
3620 Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a
|
|
|
3621 match of the 'define' option. It is also used for "\i" in a
|
|
|
3622 |pattern|. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this
|
|
|
3623 option.
|
|
|
3624 Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding
|
|
10
|
3625 environment variables. E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to
|
|
7
|
3626 expand "$HOME/.viminfo". Maybe you should change 'iskeyword' instead.
|
|
|
3627
|
|
|
3628 *'iskeyword'* *'isk'*
|
|
|
3629 'iskeyword' 'isk' string (Vim default for MS-DOS and Win32:
|
|
|
3630 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
|
|
|
3631 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255"
|
|
|
3632 Vi default: "@,48-57,_")
|
|
|
3633 local to buffer
|
|
|
3634 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3635 Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands:
|
|
10
|
3636 "w", "*", "[i", etc. It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|. See
|
|
7
|
3637 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. For C
|
|
|
3638 programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>".
|
|
|
3639 For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except
|
|
|
3640 '*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that
|
|
|
3641 command).
|
|
|
3642 When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included.
|
|
|
3643 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
3644 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
3645
|
|
|
3646 *'isprint'* *'isp'*
|
|
|
3647 'isprint' 'isp' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32, OS/2 and Macintosh:
|
|
|
3648 "@,~-255"; otherwise: "@,161-255")
|
|
|
3649 global
|
|
|
3650 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3651 The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the
|
|
|
3652 screen. It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|. The characters from
|
|
|
3653 space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly,
|
|
|
3654 even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded. See
|
|
|
3655 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.
|
|
|
3656
|
|
|
3657 Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters:
|
|
|
3658 0 - 31 "^@" - "^_"
|
|
|
3659 32 - 126 always single characters
|
|
|
3660 127 "^?"
|
|
|
3661 128 - 159 "~@" - "~_"
|
|
|
3662 160 - 254 "| " - "|~"
|
|
|
3663 255 "~?"
|
|
|
3664 When 'encoding' is a Unicode one, illegal bytes from 128 to 255 are
|
|
|
3665 displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte.
|
|
|
3666 When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are
|
|
|
3667 displayed as <xx>.
|
|
|
3668 The NonText highlighting will be used for unprintable characters.
|
|
|
3669 |hl-NonText|
|
|
|
3670
|
|
|
3671 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
|
|
|
3672 characters up to 255 are specified with this option. When a character
|
|
|
3673 is printable but it is not available in the current font, a
|
|
|
3674 replacement character will be shown.
|
|
|
3675 Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>.
|
|
|
3676 There is no option to specify these characters.
|
|
|
3677
|
|
|
3678 *'joinspaces'* *'js'* *'nojoinspaces'* *'nojs'*
|
|
|
3679 'joinspaces' 'js' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
3680 global
|
|
|
3681 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3682 Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command.
|
|
|
3683 When 'cpoptions' includes the 'j' flag, only do this after a '.'.
|
|
|
3684 Otherwise only one space is inserted.
|
|
|
3685 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
3686
|
|
|
3687 *'key'*
|
|
|
3688 'key' string (default "")
|
|
|
3689 local to buffer
|
|
|
3690 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3691 The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer.
|
|
|
3692 See |encryption|.
|
|
|
3693 Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed
|
|
|
3694 key. Use the |:X| command. But you can make 'key' empty: >
|
|
|
3695 :set key=
|
|
|
3696 < It is not possible to get the value of this option with ":set key" or
|
|
|
3697 "echo &key". This is to avoid showing it to someone who shouldn't
|
|
|
3698 know. It also means you cannot see it yourself once you have set it,
|
|
|
3699 be careful not to make a typing error!
|
|
|
3700
|
|
|
3701 *'keymap'* *'kmp'* *E544*
|
|
|
3702 'keymap' 'kmp' string (default "")
|
|
|
3703 local to buffer
|
|
|
3704 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3705 {only available when compiled with the |+keymap|
|
|
|
3706 feature}
|
|
|
3707 Name of a keyboard mapping. See |mbyte-keymap|.
|
|
|
3708 Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of
|
|
|
3709 setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective.
|
|
|
3710 'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1
|
|
36
|
3711 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
|
|
7
|
3712
|
|
|
3713 *'keymodel'* *'km'*
|
|
|
3714 'keymodel' 'km' string (default "")
|
|
|
3715 global
|
|
|
3716 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3717 List of comma separated words, which enable special things that keys
|
|
|
3718 can do. These values can be used:
|
|
|
3719 startsel Using a shifted special key starts selection (either
|
|
|
3720 Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being
|
|
|
3721 present in 'selectmode').
|
|
|
3722 stopsel Using a not-shifted special key stops selection.
|
|
|
3723 Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>,
|
|
|
3724 <PageUp> and <PageDown>.
|
|
|
3725 The 'keymodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.
|
|
|
3726
|
|
|
3727 *'keywordprg'* *'kp'*
|
|
|
3728 'keywordprg' 'kp' string (default "man" or "man -s", DOS: ":help",
|
|
|
3729 OS/2: "view /", VMS: "help")
|
|
|
3730 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
|
3731 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3732 Program to use for the |K| command. Environment variables are
|
|
|
3733 expanded |:set_env|. ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal
|
|
|
3734 help. (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty
|
|
|
3735 value did this, which is now deprecated.)
|
|
|
3736 When "man" is used, Vim will automatically translate a count for the
|
|
|
3737 "K" command to a section number. Also for "man -s", in which case the
|
|
|
3738 "-s" is removed when there is no count.
|
|
|
3739 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
|
3740 Example: >
|
|
|
3741 :set keywordprg=man\ -s
|
|
|
3742 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
3743 security reasons.
|
|
|
3744
|
|
|
3745 *'langmap'* *'lmap'* *E357* *E358*
|
|
|
3746 'langmap' 'lmap' string (default "")
|
|
|
3747 global
|
|
|
3748 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3749 {only available when compiled with the |+langmap|
|
|
|
3750 feature}
|
|
|
3751 This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language
|
|
10
|
3752 mode. When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are
|
|
7
|
3753 inserted directly. When in command mode the 'langmap' option takes
|
|
|
3754 care of translating these special characters to the original meaning
|
|
|
3755 of the key. This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to
|
|
|
3756 be able to execute Normal mode commands.
|
|
|
3757 This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are
|
|
|
3758 mapped in Insert mode.
|
|
|
3759 This only works for 8-bit characters. The value of 'langmap' may be
|
|
|
3760 specified with multi-byte characters (e.g., UTF-8), but only the lower
|
|
|
3761 8 bits of each character will be used.
|
|
|
3762
|
|
|
3763 Example (for Greek): *greek* >
|
|
|
3764 :set langmap=ÁA,ÂB,ØC,ÄD,ÅE,ÖF,ÃG,ÇH,ÉI,ÎJ,ÊK,ËL,ÌM,ÍN,ÏO,ÐP,QQ,ÑR,ÓS,ÔT,ÈU,ÙV,WW,×X,ÕY,ÆZ,áa,âb,øc,äd,åe,öf,ãg,çh,éi,îj,êk,ël,ìm,ín,ïo,ðp,qq,ñr,ós,ôt,èu,ùv,òw,÷x,õy,æz
|
|
|
3765 < Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): >
|
|
|
3766 :set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ
|
|
|
3767 <
|
|
|
3768 The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas. Each
|
|
|
3769 part can be in one of two forms:
|
|
|
3770 1. A list of pairs. Each pair is a "from" character immediately
|
|
|
3771 followed by the "to" character. Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC".
|
|
|
3772 2. A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to"
|
|
|
3773 characters. Example: "abc;ABC"
|
|
|
3774 Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE"
|
|
|
3775 Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash. These are
|
|
|
3776 ";", ',' and backslash itself.
|
|
|
3777
|
|
|
3778 This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch
|
|
|
3779 back and forth between the languages. Your language characters will
|
|
|
3780 be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the
|
|
|
3781 langmap mappings) in the following cases:
|
|
|
3782 o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings)
|
|
|
3783 o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R
|
|
|
3784 o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings
|
|
|
3785 Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by
|
|
|
3786 this option. Note that this option can be changed at any time
|
|
|
3787 allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings.
|
|
|
3788 Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time!
|
|
|
3789
|
|
|
3790 *'langmenu'* *'lm'*
|
|
|
3791 'langmenu' 'lm' string (default "")
|
|
|
3792 global
|
|
|
3793 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3794 {only available when compiled with the |+menu| and
|
|
|
3795 |+multi_lang| features}
|
|
|
3796 Language to use for menu translation. Tells which file is loaded
|
|
|
3797 from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': >
|
|
|
3798 "lang/menu_" . &langmenu . ".vim"
|
|
|
3799 < (without the spaces). For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no
|
|
|
3800 matter what $LANG is set to: >
|
|
|
3801 :set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1
|
|
|
3802 < When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used.
|
|
36
|
3803 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
|
|
7
|
3804 If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use
|
|
|
3805 the English menus: >
|
|
|
3806 :set langmenu=none
|
|
|
3807 < This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype
|
|
|
3808 detection or syntax highlighting. Once the menus are defined setting
|
|
|
3809 this option has no effect. But you could do this: >
|
|
|
3810 :source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim
|
|
|
3811 :set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1
|
|
|
3812 :source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
|
|
|
3813 < Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!
|
|
|
3814
|
|
|
3815 *'laststatus'* *'ls'*
|
|
|
3816 'laststatus' 'ls' number (default 1)
|
|
|
3817 global
|
|
|
3818 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3819 The value of this option influences when the last window will have a
|
|
|
3820 status line:
|
|
|
3821 0: never
|
|
|
3822 1: only if there are at least two windows
|
|
|
3823 2: always
|
|
|
3824 The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several
|
|
|
3825 windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line|
|
|
|
3826
|
|
|
3827 *'lazyredraw'* *'lz'* *'nolazyredraw'* *'nolz'*
|
|
|
3828 'lazyredraw' 'lz' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
3829 global
|
|
|
3830 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3831 When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while
|
|
|
3832 executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been
|
|
10
|
3833 typed. Also, updating the window title is postponed. To force an
|
|
7
|
3834 update use |:redraw|.
|
|
|
3835
|
|
|
3836 *'linebreak'* *'lbr'* *'nolinebreak'* *'nolbr'*
|
|
|
3837 'linebreak' 'lbr' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
3838 local to window
|
|
|
3839 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3840 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
|
|
|
3841 feature}
|
|
|
3842 If on Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
|
|
|
3843 than at the last character that fits on the screen. Unlike
|
|
|
3844 'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file,
|
|
|
3845 it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents. The
|
|
|
3846 value of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines.
|
|
|
3847 This option is not used when the 'wrap' option is off or 'list' is on.
|
|
|
3848 Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed
|
|
|
3849 with the right amount of white space.
|
|
|
3850
|
|
|
3851 *'lines'* *E593*
|
|
|
3852 'lines' number (default 24 or terminal height)
|
|
|
3853 global
|
|
|
3854 Number of lines of the Vim window.
|
|
|
3855 Normally you don't need to set this. It is done automatically by the
|
|
|
3856 terminal initialization code.
|
|
|
3857 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
|
|
|
3858 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want
|
|
|
3859 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
|
|
|
3860 Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen. You can
|
|
|
3861 use this command to get the tallest window possible: >
|
|
|
3862 :set lines=999
|
|
|
3863 < If you get less lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option.
|
|
|
3864 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
|
|
|
3865 number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up.
|
|
|
3866
|
|
|
3867 *'linespace'* *'lsp'*
|
|
|
3868 'linespace' 'lsp' number (default 0, 1 for Win32 GUI)
|
|
|
3869 global
|
|
|
3870 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3871 {only in the GUI}
|
|
|
3872 Number of pixel lines inserted between characters. Useful if the font
|
|
|
3873 uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other.
|
|
|
3874 When non-zero there is room for underlining.
|
|
|
3875
|
|
|
3876 *'lisp'* *'nolisp'*
|
|
|
3877 'lisp' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
3878 local to buffer
|
|
|
3879 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
|
|
|
3880 feature}
|
|
|
3881 Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for
|
|
|
3882 the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of). Also happens with
|
|
|
3883 "cc" or "S". 'autoindent' must also be on for this to work. The 'p'
|
|
|
3884 flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or
|
|
|
3885 better. Also see 'lispwords'.
|
|
|
3886 The '-' character is included in keyword characters. Redefines the
|
|
|
3887 "=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than
|
|
|
3888 calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty.
|
|
|
3889 This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
|
|
|
3890 {Vi: Does it a little bit differently}
|
|
|
3891
|
|
|
3892 *'lispwords'* *'lw'*
|
|
|
3893 'lispwords' 'lw' string (default is very long)
|
|
|
3894 global
|
|
|
3895 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3896 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
|
|
|
3897 feature}
|
|
|
3898 Comma separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting.
|
|
|
3899 |'lisp'|
|
|
|
3900
|
|
|
3901 *'list'* *'nolist'*
|
|
|
3902 'list' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
3903 local to window
|
|
|
3904 List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I, show end of line with $. Useful to
|
|
|
3905 see the difference between tabs and spaces and for trailing blanks.
|
|
|
3906 Note that this will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth' or
|
|
|
3907 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'. See 'listchars' for
|
|
|
3908 changing the way tabs are displayed.
|
|
|
3909
|
|
|
3910 *'listchars'* *'lcs'*
|
|
|
3911 'listchars' 'lcs' string (default "eol:$")
|
|
|
3912 global
|
|
|
3913 {not in Vi}
|
|
10
|
3914 Strings to use in 'list' mode. It is a comma separated list of string
|
|
7
|
3915 settings.
|
|
|
3916 eol:c Character to show at the end of each line. When
|
|
|
3917 omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
|
|
|
3918 line.
|
|
|
3919 tab:xy Two characters to be used to show a Tab. The first
|
|
|
3920 char is used once. The second char is repeated to
|
|
|
3921 fill the space that the Tab normally occupies.
|
|
|
3922 "tab:>-" will show a Tab that takes four spaces as
|
|
|
3923 ">---". When omitted, a Tab is show as ^I.
|
|
10
|
3924 trail:c Character to show for trailing spaces. When omitted,
|
|
7
|
3925 trailing spaces are blank.
|
|
|
3926 extends:c Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
|
|
|
3927 off and the line continues beyond the right of the
|
|
|
3928 screen.
|
|
|
3929 precedes:c Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap'
|
|
|
3930 is off and there is text preceding the character
|
|
|
3931 visible in the first column.
|
|
13
|
3932 nbsp:c Character to show for a non-breakable space (character
|
|
|
3933 0xA0, 160). Left blank when omitted.
|
|
7
|
3934
|
|
10
|
3935 The characters ':' and ',' should not be used. UTF-8 characters can
|
|
7
|
3936 be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable
|
|
|
3937 characters are allowed.
|
|
|
3938
|
|
|
3939 Examples: >
|
|
|
3940 :set lcs=tab:>-,trail:-
|
|
12
|
3941 :set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:%
|
|
7
|
3942 :set lcs=extends:>,precedes:<
|
|
|
3943 < The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and
|
|
12
|
3944 "precedes". "SpecialKey" for "nbsp", "tab" and "trail".
|
|
7
|
3945
|
|
|
3946 *'lpl'* *'nolpl'* *'loadplugins'* *'noloadplugins'*
|
|
|
3947 'loadplugins' 'lpl' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
3948 global
|
|
|
3949 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3950 When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|.
|
|
|
3951 This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading
|
|
|
3952 of plugins.
|
|
|
3953 Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
|
|
|
3954 reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
|
|
|
3955
|
|
|
3956 *'magic'* *'nomagic'*
|
|
|
3957 'magic' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
3958 global
|
|
|
3959 Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns.
|
|
|
3960 See |pattern|.
|
|
|
3961 NOTE: To avoid portability problems with using patterns, always keep
|
|
|
3962 this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with
|
|
|
3963 old Vi scripts. In any other situation write patterns that work when
|
|
20
|
3964 'magic' is on. Include "\M" when you want to |/\M|.
|
|
7
|
3965
|
|
|
3966 *'makeef'* *'mef'*
|
|
|
3967 'makeef' 'mef' string (default: "")
|
|
|
3968 global
|
|
|
3969 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3970 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
|
|
3971 feature}
|
|
|
3972 Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|)
|
|
|
3973 and the |:grep| command.
|
|
|
3974 When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used.
|
|
|
3975 When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name
|
|
|
3976 unique. This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an
|
|
|
3977 existing file.
|
|
|
3978 NOT used for the ":cf" command. See 'errorfile' for that.
|
|
|
3979 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
|
3980 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
|
3981 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
3982 security reasons.
|
|
|
3983
|
|
|
3984 *'makeprg'* *'mp'*
|
|
|
3985 'makeprg' 'mp' string (default "make", VMS: "MMS")
|
|
|
3986 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
|
3987 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
3988 Program to use for the ":make" command. See |:make_makeprg|. This
|
|
|
3989 option may contain '%' and '#' characters, which are expanded like
|
|
|
3990 when used in a command-line. Environment variables are expanded
|
|
|
3991 |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and
|
|
|
3992 backslashes. Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set"
|
|
|
3993 and once for the interpretation of a command. When you use a filter
|
|
|
3994 called "myfilter" do it like this: >
|
|
|
3995 :set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter
|
|
|
3996 < The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify
|
|
|
3997 where the arguments will be included, for example: >
|
|
|
3998 :set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*}
|
|
|
3999 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
4000 security reasons.
|
|
|
4001
|
|
|
4002 *'matchpairs'* *'mps'*
|
|
|
4003 'matchpairs' 'mps' string (default "(:),{:},[:]")
|
|
|
4004 local to buffer
|
|
|
4005 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4006 Characters that form pairs. The |%| command jumps from one to the
|
|
10
|
4007 other. Currently only single character pairs are allowed, and they
|
|
7
|
4008 must be different. The characters must be separated by a colon. The
|
|
|
4009 pairs must be separated by a comma. Example for including '<' and '>'
|
|
|
4010 (HTML): >
|
|
|
4011 :set mps+=<:>
|
|
|
4012
|
|
|
4013 < A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an
|
|
|
4014 assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: >
|
|
|
4015 :au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:;
|
|
|
4016
|
|
|
4017 < For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in
|
|
|
4018 the $VIMRUNTIME/macros directory. |add-local-help|
|
|
|
4019
|
|
|
4020 *'matchtime'* *'mat'*
|
|
|
4021 'matchtime' 'mat' number (default 5)
|
|
|
4022 global
|
|
|
4023 {not in Vi}{in Nvi}
|
|
|
4024 Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is
|
|
|
4025 set. Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that
|
|
|
4026 set a time. This is to be compatible with Nvi.
|
|
|
4027
|
|
|
4028 *'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'*
|
|
|
4029 'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd' number (default 100)
|
|
|
4030 global
|
|
|
4031 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4032 Maximum depth of function calls for user functions. This normally
|
|
|
4033 catches endless recursion. When using a recursive function with
|
|
|
4034 more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number. But this will use
|
|
|
4035 more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted.
|
|
|
4036 See also |:function|.
|
|
|
4037
|
|
|
4038 *'maxmapdepth'* *'mmd'* *E223*
|
|
|
4039 'maxmapdepth' 'mmd' number (default 1000)
|
|
|
4040 global
|
|
|
4041 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4042 Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a
|
|
|
4043 character to be used. This normally catches endless mappings, like
|
|
|
4044 ":map x y" with ":map y x". It still does not catch ":map g wg",
|
|
|
4045 because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done. See also
|
|
|
4046 |key-mapping|.
|
|
|
4047
|
|
|
4048 *'maxmem'* *'mm'*
|
|
|
4049 'maxmem' 'mm' number (default between 256 to 5120 (system
|
|
|
4050 dependent) or half the amount of memory
|
|
|
4051 available)
|
|
|
4052 global
|
|
|
4053 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4054 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer. When this
|
|
|
4055 limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause
|
|
|
4056 other memory to be freed. Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work
|
|
|
4057 without a limit. Also see 'maxmemtot'.
|
|
|
4058
|
|
|
4059 *'maxmemtot'* *'mmt'*
|
|
|
4060 'maxmemtot' 'mmt' number (default between 2048 and 10240 (system
|
|
|
4061 dependent) or half the amount of memory
|
|
|
4062 available)
|
|
|
4063 global
|
|
|
4064 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4065 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for all buffers together.
|
|
10
|
4066 Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. Also see
|
|
7
|
4067 'maxmem'.
|
|
|
4068
|
|
|
4069 *'menuitems'* *'mis'*
|
|
|
4070 'menuitems' 'mis' number (default 25)
|
|
|
4071 global
|
|
|
4072 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4073 {not available when compiled without the |+menu|
|
|
|
4074 feature}
|
|
|
4075 Maximum number of items to use in a menu. Used for menus that are
|
|
|
4076 generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu. Changing this
|
|
|
4077 option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first.
|
|
|
4078
|
|
|
4079 *'modeline'* *'ml'* *'nomodeline'* *'noml'*
|
|
|
4080 'modeline' 'ml' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
|
|
4081 local to buffer
|
|
|
4082 *'modelines'* *'mls'*
|
|
|
4083 'modelines' 'mls' number (default 5)
|
|
|
4084 global
|
|
|
4085 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4086 If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
|
|
|
4087 checked for set commands. If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
|
|
|
4088 no lines are checked. See |modeline|.
|
|
|
4089 NOTE: 'modeline' is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
4090 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
4091
|
|
|
4092 *'modifiable'* *'ma'* *'nomodifiable'* *'noma'*
|
|
|
4093 'modifiable' 'ma' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
4094 local to buffer
|
|
|
4095 {not in Vi} *E21*
|
|
|
4096 When off the buffer contents cannot be changed. The 'fileformat' and
|
|
|
4097 'fileencoding' options also can't be changed.
|
|
|
4098 Can be reset with the |-M| command line argument.
|
|
|
4099
|
|
|
4100 *'modified'* *'mod'* *'nomodified'* *'nomod'*
|
|
|
4101 'modified' 'mod' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
4102 local to buffer
|
|
|
4103 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4104 When on, the buffer is considered to be modified. This option is set
|
|
|
4105 when:
|
|
|
4106 1. A change was made to the text since it was last written. Using the
|
|
|
4107 |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the
|
|
|
4108 option. But undoing changes that were made before writing the
|
|
|
4109 buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from
|
|
|
4110 when it was written.
|
|
|
4111 2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original
|
|
|
4112 value. The original value is set when the buffer is read or
|
|
|
4113 written. A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
|
|
|
4114 values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
|
|
|
4115 reset.
|
|
|
4116 When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but
|
|
|
4117 will be ignored.
|
|
|
4118
|
|
|
4119 *'more'* *'nomore'*
|
|
|
4120 'more' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
|
|
4121 global
|
|
|
4122 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4123 When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled. You will get
|
|
|
4124 the |more-prompt|. When this option is off there are no pauses, the
|
|
|
4125 listing continues until finished.
|
|
|
4126 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
4127 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
4128
|
|
|
4129 *'mouse'* *E538*
|
|
|
4130 'mouse' string (default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32)
|
|
|
4131 global
|
|
|
4132 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4133 Enable the use of the mouse. Only works for certain terminals
|
|
|
4134 (xterm, MS-DOS, Win32 |win32-mouse|, QNX pterm, and Linux console
|
|
|
4135 with gpm). For using the mouse in the GUI, see |gui-mouse|.
|
|
|
4136 The mouse can be enabled for different modes:
|
|
|
4137 n Normal mode
|
|
|
4138 v Visual mode
|
|
|
4139 i Insert mode
|
|
|
4140 c Command-line mode
|
|
|
4141 h all previous modes when editing a help file
|
|
|
4142 a all previous modes
|
|
|
4143 r for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt
|
|
|
4144 A auto-select in Visual mode
|
|
|
4145 Normally you would enable the mouse in all four modes with: >
|
|
|
4146 :set mouse=a
|
|
|
4147 < When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for
|
|
|
4148 modeless selection. This doesn't move the text cursor.
|
|
|
4149
|
|
|
4150 See |mouse-using|. Also see |'clipboard'|.
|
|
|
4151
|
|
|
4152 Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the
|
|
10
|
4153 "* register if there is access to an X-server. The xterm handling of
|
|
7
|
4154 the mouse buttons can still be used by keeping the shift key pressed.
|
|
|
4155 Also see the 'clipboard' option.
|
|
|
4156
|
|
|
4157 *'mousefocus'* *'mousef'* *'nomousefocus'* *'nomousef'*
|
|
|
4158 'mousefocus' 'mousef' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
4159 global
|
|
|
4160 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4161 {only works in the GUI}
|
|
|
4162 The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated.
|
|
|
4163 When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the
|
|
|
4164 mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus. Off is the
|
|
|
4165 default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as
|
|
|
4166 a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally.
|
|
|
4167
|
|
|
4168 *'mousehide'* *'mh'* *'nomousehide'* *'nomh'*
|
|
|
4169 'mousehide' 'mh' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
4170 global
|
|
|
4171 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4172 {only works in the GUI}
|
|
|
4173 When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed.
|
|
|
4174 The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved.
|
|
|
4175
|
|
|
4176 *'mousemodel'* *'mousem'*
|
|
|
4177 'mousemodel' 'mousem' string (default "extend", "popup" for MS-DOS and Win32)
|
|
|
4178 global
|
|
|
4179 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4180 Sets the model to use for the mouse. The name mostly specifies what
|
|
|
4181 the right mouse button is used for:
|
|
|
4182 extend Right mouse button extends a selection. This works
|
|
|
4183 like in an xterm.
|
|
|
4184 popup Right mouse button pops up a menu. The shifted left
|
|
|
4185 mouse button extends a selection. This works like
|
|
|
4186 with Microsoft Windows
|
|
|
4187 popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the
|
|
|
4188 position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the
|
|
|
4189 selected operation will act upon the clicked object.
|
|
|
4190 If clicking inside a selection, that selection will
|
|
|
4191 be acted upon, ie. no cursor move. This implies of
|
|
|
4192 course, that right clicking outside a selection will
|
|
|
4193 end Visual mode.
|
|
|
4194 Overview of what button does what for each model:
|
|
|
4195 mouse extend popup(_setpos) ~
|
|
|
4196 left click place cursor place cursor
|
|
|
4197 left drag start selection start selection
|
|
|
4198 shift-left search word extend selection
|
|
|
4199 right click extend selection popup menu (place cursor)
|
|
|
4200 right drag extend selection -
|
|
|
4201 middle click paste paste
|
|
|
4202
|
|
|
4203 In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu.
|
|
|
4204 You need to define this first, see |popup-menu|.
|
|
|
4205
|
|
|
4206 Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings.
|
|
|
4207 See |gui-mouse-mapping|. But mappings are NOT used for modeless
|
|
|
4208 selection (because that's handled in the GUI code directly).
|
|
|
4209
|
|
|
4210 The 'mousemodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.
|
|
|
4211
|
|
|
4212 *'mouseshape'* *'mouses'* *E547*
|
|
|
4213 'mouseshape' 'mouses' string (default "i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross,
|
|
|
4214 m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow"
|
|
|
4215 global
|
|
|
4216 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4217 {only available when compiled with the |+mouseshape|
|
|
|
4218 feature}
|
|
|
4219 This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in
|
|
|
4220 different modes. The option is a comma separated list of parts, much
|
|
|
4221 like used for 'guicursor'. Each part consist of a mode/location-list
|
|
|
4222 and an argument-list:
|
|
|
4223 mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,..
|
|
|
4224 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations:
|
|
|
4225 In a normal window: ~
|
|
|
4226 n Normal mode
|
|
|
4227 v Visual mode
|
|
|
4228 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
|
|
|
4229 if not specified)
|
|
|
4230 o Operator-pending mode
|
|
|
4231 i Insert mode
|
|
|
4232 r Replace mode
|
|
|
4233
|
|
|
4234 Others: ~
|
|
|
4235 c appending to the command-line
|
|
|
4236 ci inserting in the command-line
|
|
|
4237 cr replacing in the command-line
|
|
|
4238 m at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts
|
|
|
4239 ml idem, but cursor in the last line
|
|
|
4240 e any mode, pointer below last window
|
|
|
4241 s any mode, pointer on a status line
|
|
|
4242 sd any mode, while dragging a status line
|
|
|
4243 vs any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line
|
|
|
4244 vd any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line
|
|
|
4245 a everywhere
|
|
|
4246
|
|
|
4247 The shape is one of the following:
|
|
|
4248 avail name looks like ~
|
|
|
4249 w x arrow Normal mouse pointer
|
|
|
4250 w x blank no pointer at all (use with care!)
|
|
|
4251 w x beam I-beam
|
|
|
4252 w x updown up-down sizing arrows
|
|
|
4253 w x leftright left-right sizing arrows
|
|
|
4254 w x busy The system's usual busy pointer
|
|
|
4255 w x no The system's usual 'no input' pointer
|
|
|
4256 x udsizing indicates up-down resizing
|
|
|
4257 x lrsizing indicates left-right resizing
|
|
|
4258 x crosshair like a big thin +
|
|
|
4259 x hand1 black hand
|
|
|
4260 x hand2 white hand
|
|
|
4261 x pencil what you write with
|
|
|
4262 x question big ?
|
|
|
4263 x rightup-arrow arrow pointing right-up
|
|
|
4264 w x up-arrow arrow pointing up
|
|
|
4265 x <number> any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h)
|
|
|
4266
|
|
|
4267 The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32,
|
|
|
4268 x for X11.
|
|
|
4269 Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse
|
|
|
4270 pointer.
|
|
|
4271
|
|
|
4272 Example: >
|
|
|
4273 :set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no
|
|
|
4274 < will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and
|
|
|
4275 indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since
|
|
|
4276 clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.)
|
|
|
4277
|
|
|
4278 *'mousetime'* *'mouset'*
|
|
|
4279 'mousetime' 'mouset' number (default 500)
|
|
|
4280 global
|
|
|
4281 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4282 Only for GUI, MS-DOS, Win32 and Unix with xterm. Defines the maximum
|
|
|
4283 time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be
|
|
|
4284 recognized as a multi click.
|
|
|
4285
|
|
14
|
4286 *'mzquantum'* *'mzq'*
|
|
|
4287 'mzquantum' 'mzq' number (default 100)
|
|
|
4288 global
|
|
|
4289 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4290 {not available when compiled without the |+mzscheme|
|
|
|
4291 feature}
|
|
|
4292 The number of milliseconds between polls for MzScheme threads.
|
|
|
4293 Negative or zero value means no thread scheduling.
|
|
|
4294
|
|
7
|
4295 *'nrformats'* *'nf'*
|
|
|
4296 'nrformats' 'nf' string (default "octal,hex")
|
|
|
4297 local to buffer
|
|
|
4298 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4299 This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the
|
|
|
4300 CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number
|
|
|
4301 respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
|
|
|
4302 alpha if included, single alphabetical characters will be
|
|
|
4303 incremented or decremented. This is useful for a list with a
|
|
|
4304 letter index a), b), etc.
|
|
|
4305 octal if included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
|
|
|
4306 to be octal. Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
|
|
|
4307 hex if included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
|
|
|
4308 considered to be hexadecimal. Example: Using CTRL-X on
|
|
|
4309 "0x100" results in "0x0ff".
|
|
|
4310 Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always
|
|
|
4311 considered decimal. This also happens for numbers that are not
|
|
|
4312 recognized as octal or hex.
|
|
|
4313
|
|
|
4314 *'number'* *'nu'* *'nonumber'* *'nonu'*
|
|
|
4315 'number' 'nu' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
4316 local to window
|
|
|
4317 Print the line number in front of each line. When the 'n' option is
|
|
|
4318 excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of
|
|
|
4319 line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set).
|
|
13
|
4320 The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line
|
|
|
4321 number.
|
|
7
|
4322 When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
|
|
|
4323 characters are put before the number.
|
|
|
4324 See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
|
|
|
4325
|
|
13
|
4326 *'numberwidth'* *'nuw'*
|
|
|
4327 'numberwidth' 'nuw' number (Vim default: 4 Vi default: 8)
|
|
|
4328 local to window
|
|
14
|
4329 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4330 {only available when compiled with the |+linebreak|
|
|
|
4331 feature}
|
|
13
|
4332 Minimal number of columns to use for the line number. Only relevant
|
|
|
4333 when the 'number' option is set.
|
|
|
4334 Since one space is always between the number and the text, there is
|
|
|
4335 one less character for the number itself.
|
|
|
4336 The value is the minimum width. A bigger width is used when needed to
|
|
|
4337 fit the highest line number in the buffer. Thus with the Vim default
|
|
|
4338 of 4 there is room for a line number up to 999. When the buffer has
|
|
|
4339 1000 lines five columns will be used.
|
|
|
4340 The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 10.
|
|
|
4341 NOTE: 'numberwidth' is reset to 8 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
4342
|
|
7
|
4343 *'osfiletype'* *'oft'* *E366*
|
|
|
4344 'osfiletype' 'oft' string (RISC-OS default: "Text",
|
|
|
4345 others default: "")
|
|
|
4346 local to buffer
|
|
|
4347 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4348 {only available when compiled with the |+osfiletype|
|
|
|
4349 feature}
|
|
|
4350 Some operating systems store extra information about files besides
|
|
|
4351 name, datestamp and permissions. This option contains the extra
|
|
|
4352 information, the nature of which will vary between systems.
|
|
|
4353 The value of this option is usually set when the file is loaded, and
|
|
|
4354 use to set the file type when file is written.
|
|
|
4355 It can affect the pattern matching of the automatic commands.
|
|
|
4356 |autocmd-osfiletypes|
|
|
|
4357
|
|
|
4358 *'paragraphs'* *'para'*
|
|
|
4359 'paragraphs' 'para' string (default "IPLPPPQPP LIpplpipbp")
|
|
|
4360 global
|
|
|
4361 Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs. These are pairs
|
|
|
4362 of two letters (see |object-motions|).
|
|
|
4363
|
|
|
4364 *'paste'* *'nopaste'*
|
|
|
4365 'paste' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
4366 global
|
|
|
4367 {not in Vi}
|
|
10
|
4368 Put Vim in Paste mode. This is useful if you want to cut or copy
|
|
|
4369 some text from one window and paste it in Vim. This will avoid
|
|
7
|
4370 unexpected effects.
|
|
|
4371 Setting this option is useful when using Vim in a terminal, where Vim
|
|
10
|
4372 cannot distinguish between typed text and pasted text. In the GUI, Vim
|
|
7
|
4373 knows about pasting and will mostly do the right thing without 'paste'
|
|
|
4374 being set. The same is true for a terminal where Vim handles the
|
|
|
4375 mouse clicks itself.
|
|
|
4376 When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on):
|
|
|
4377 - mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled
|
|
|
4378 - abbreviations are disabled
|
|
|
4379 - 'textwidth' is set to 0
|
|
|
4380 - 'wrapmargin' is set to 0
|
|
|
4381 - 'autoindent' is reset
|
|
|
4382 - 'smartindent' is reset
|
|
|
4383 - 'softtabstop' is set to 0
|
|
|
4384 - 'revins' is reset
|
|
|
4385 - 'ruler' is reset
|
|
|
4386 - 'showmatch' is reset
|
|
|
4387 - 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty
|
|
|
4388 These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled:
|
|
|
4389 - 'lisp'
|
|
|
4390 - 'indentexpr'
|
|
|
4391 - 'cindent'
|
|
|
4392 NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is
|
|
|
4393 on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the
|
|
|
4394 settings again, causing trouble when pasting text. You might want to
|
|
|
4395 set the 'paste' option again.
|
|
|
4396 When the 'paste' option is reset the mentioned options are restored to
|
|
|
4397 the value before the moment 'paste' was switched from off to on.
|
|
|
4398 Resetting 'paste' before ever setting it does not have any effect.
|
|
|
4399 Since mapping doesn't work while 'paste' is active, you need to use
|
|
|
4400 the 'pastetoggle' option to toggle the 'paste' option with some key.
|
|
|
4401
|
|
|
4402 *'pastetoggle'* *'pt'*
|
|
|
4403 'pastetoggle' 'pt' string (default "")
|
|
|
4404 global
|
|
|
4405 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4406 When non-empty, specifies the key sequence that toggles the 'paste'
|
|
|
4407 option. This is like specifying a mapping: >
|
|
|
4408 :map {keys} :set invpaste<CR>
|
|
|
4409 < Where {keys} is the value of 'pastetoggle'.
|
|
|
4410 The difference is that it will work even when 'paste' is set.
|
|
|
4411 'pastetoggle' works in Insert mode and Normal mode, but not in
|
|
|
4412 Command-line mode.
|
|
|
4413 Mappings are checked first, thus overrule 'pastetoggle'. However,
|
|
|
4414 when 'paste' is on mappings are ignored in Insert mode, thus you can do
|
|
|
4415 this: >
|
|
|
4416 :map <F10> :set paste<CR>
|
|
|
4417 :map <F11> :set nopaste<CR>
|
|
|
4418 :imap <F10> <C-O>:set paste<CR>
|
|
|
4419 :imap <F11> <nop>
|
|
|
4420 :set pastetoggle=<F11>
|
|
|
4421 < This will make <F10> start paste mode and <F11> stop paste mode.
|
|
|
4422 Note that typing <F10> in paste mode inserts "<F10>", since in paste
|
|
|
4423 mode everything is inserted literally, except the 'pastetoggle' key
|
|
|
4424 sequence.
|
|
|
4425
|
|
|
4426 *'pex'* *'patchexpr'*
|
|
|
4427 'patchexpr' 'pex' string (default "")
|
|
|
4428 global
|
|
|
4429 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4430 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
|
|
|
4431 feature}
|
|
|
4432 Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate
|
|
10
|
4433 the resulting new version of the file. See |diff-patchexpr|.
|
|
7
|
4434
|
|
|
4435 *'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E206*
|
|
|
4436 'patchmode' 'pm' string (default "")
|
|
|
4437 global
|
|
|
4438 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4439 When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept. This can be used
|
|
|
4440 to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a
|
|
|
4441 source distribution. Only the first time that a file is written a
|
|
|
4442 copy of the original file will be kept. The name of the copy is the
|
|
|
4443 name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option
|
|
|
4444 appended. This option should start with a dot. Use a string like
|
|
|
4445 ".org". 'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work (Detail: The
|
|
|
4446 backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the new file has
|
|
|
4447 been successfully written, that's why it must be possible to write a
|
|
|
4448 backup file). If there was no file to be backed up, an empty file is
|
|
|
4449 created.
|
|
|
4450 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made.
|
|
|
4451 Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the
|
|
|
4452 end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always
|
|
|
4453 recognized as a compressed file.
|
|
36
|
4454 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
|
|
7
|
4455
|
|
|
4456 *'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347*
|
|
|
4457 'path' 'pa' string (default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,,"
|
|
|
4458 on OS/2: ".,/emx/include,,"
|
|
|
4459 other systems: ".,,")
|
|
|
4460 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
|
4461 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4462 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
|
|
|
4463 |gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find| and other commands, provided that the file
|
|
|
4464 being searched for has a relative path (not starting with '/'). The
|
|
|
4465 directories in the 'path' option may be relative or absolute.
|
|
|
4466 - Use commas to separate directory names: >
|
|
|
4467 :set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include
|
|
|
4468 < - Spaces can also be used to separate directory names (for backwards
|
|
|
4469 compatibility with version 3.0). To have a space in a directory
|
|
|
4470 name, precede it with an extra backslash, and escape the space: >
|
|
|
4471 :set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space
|
|
|
4472 < - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra
|
|
|
4473 backslash: >
|
|
|
4474 :set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma
|
|
|
4475 < - To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: >
|
|
|
4476 :set path=.
|
|
|
4477 < - To search in the current directory use an empty string between two
|
|
|
4478 commas: >
|
|
|
4479 :set path=,,
|
|
|
4480 < - A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'.
|
|
|
4481 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
|
4482 - When using |netrw.vim| URLs can be used. For example, adding
|
|
|
4483 "http://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work.
|
|
|
4484 - Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree:
|
|
|
4485 1) "*" matches a sequence of characters, e.g.: >
|
|
|
4486 :set path=/usr/include/*
|
|
|
4487 < means all subdirectories in /usr/include (but not /usr/include
|
|
|
4488 itself). >
|
|
|
4489 :set path=/usr/*c
|
|
|
4490 < matches /usr/doc and /usr/src.
|
|
|
4491 2) "**" matches a subtree, up to 100 directories deep. Example: >
|
|
|
4492 :set path=/home/user_x/src/**
|
|
|
4493 < means search in the whole subtree under "/home/usr_x/src".
|
|
|
4494 3) If the path ends with a ';', this path is the startpoint
|
|
|
4495 for upward search.
|
|
|
4496 See |file-searching| for more info and exact syntax.
|
|
|
4497 {not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature}
|
|
|
4498 - Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: >
|
|
|
4499 :set path=.,c:\\include
|
|
|
4500 < Or just use '/' instead: >
|
|
|
4501 :set path=.,c:/include
|
|
|
4502 < Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as
|
|
|
4503 the file!
|
|
10
|
4504 The maximum length is limited. How much depends on the system, mostly
|
|
7
|
4505 it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
|
|
|
4506 You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of
|
|
|
4507 'path', see |:checkpath|.
|
|
|
4508 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
|
4509 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
|
4510 uses another default. To remove the current directory use: >
|
|
|
4511 :set path-=
|
|
|
4512 < To add the current directory use: >
|
|
|
4513 :set path+=
|
|
|
4514 < To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the
|
|
|
4515 separator. Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory
|
|
|
4516 names are separated with a semi-colon: >
|
|
|
4517 :let &path = &path . "," . substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g')
|
|
|
4518 < Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used. Note that
|
|
|
4519 this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.
|
|
|
4520
|
|
|
4521 *'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'*
|
|
|
4522 'preserveindent' 'pi' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
4523 local to buffer
|
|
|
4524 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4525 When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the
|
|
|
4526 indent structure as possible. Normally the indent is replaced by a
|
|
|
4527 series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is
|
|
|
4528 enabled, in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option
|
|
|
4529 means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible
|
|
|
4530 for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required.
|
|
|
4531 NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of
|
|
|
4532 tabs and spaces. You might not like this.
|
|
|
4533 NOTE: 'preserveindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
4534 Also see 'copyindent'.
|
|
|
4535 Use |:retab| to clean up white space.
|
|
|
4536
|
|
|
4537 *'previewheight'* *'pvh'*
|
|
|
4538 'previewheight' 'pvh' number (default 12)
|
|
|
4539 global
|
|
|
4540 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4541 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
|
|
|
4542 |+quickfix| feature}
|
|
|
4543 Default height for a preview window. Used for |:ptag| and associated
|
|
|
4544 commands. Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given.
|
|
|
4545
|
|
|
4546 *'previewwindow'* *'nopreviewwindow'*
|
|
|
4547 *'pvw'* *'nopvw'* *E590*
|
|
|
4548 'previewwindow' 'pvw' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
4549 local to window
|
|
|
4550 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4551 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
|
|
|
4552 |+quickfix| feature}
|
|
10
|
4553 Identifies the preview window. Only one window can have this option
|
|
7
|
4554 set. It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands
|
|
|
4555 |:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc.
|
|
|
4556
|
|
|
4557 *'printdevice'* *'pdev'*
|
|
|
4558 'printdevice' 'pdev' string (default empty)
|
|
|
4559 global
|
|
|
4560 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4561 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
|
|
4562 feature}
|
|
15
|
4563 The name of the printer to be used for |:hardcopy|.
|
|
|
4564 See |pdev-option|.
|
|
36
|
4565 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
4566 security reasons.
|
|
15
|
4567
|
|
|
4568 *'printencoding'* *'penc'*
|
|
|
4569 'printencoding' 'penc' String (default empty, except for some systems)
|
|
7
|
4570 global
|
|
|
4571 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4572 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
|
|
4573 and |+postscript| features}
|
|
15
|
4574 Sets the character encoding used when printing.
|
|
|
4575 See |penc-option|.
|
|
7
|
4576
|
|
|
4577 *'printexpr'* *'pexpr'*
|
|
|
4578 'printexpr' 'pexpr' String (default: see below)
|
|
|
4579 global
|
|
|
4580 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4581 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
|
|
4582 and |+postscript| features}
|
|
15
|
4583 Expression used to print the PostScript produced with |:hardcopy|.
|
|
|
4584 See |pexpr-option|.
|
|
|
4585
|
|
|
4586 *'printfont'* *'pfn'*
|
|
7
|
4587 'printfont' 'pfn' string (default "courier")
|
|
|
4588 global
|
|
|
4589 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4590 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
|
|
4591 feature}
|
|
15
|
4592 The name of the font that will be used for |:hardcopy|.
|
|
|
4593 See |pfn-option|.
|
|
7
|
4594
|
|
|
4595 *'printheader'* *'pheader'*
|
|
|
4596 'printheader' 'pheader' string (default "%<%f%h%m%=Page %N")
|
|
|
4597 global
|
|
|
4598 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4599 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
|
|
4600 feature}
|
|
15
|
4601 The format of the header produced in |:hardcopy| output.
|
|
|
4602 See |pheader-option|.
|
|
|
4603
|
|
|
4604 *'printmbcharset'* *'pmbcs'*
|
|
|
4605 'printmbcharset' 'pmbcs' string (default "")
|
|
|
4606 global
|
|
|
4607 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4608 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
|
|
4609 and |+multi_byte| features}
|
|
|
4610 The CJK character set to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|.
|
|
|
4611 See |pmbcs-option|.
|
|
|
4612
|
|
|
4613 *'printmbfont'* *'pmbfn'*
|
|
|
4614 'printmbfont' 'pmbfn' string (default "")
|
|
|
4615 global
|
|
|
4616 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4617 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
|
|
4618 and |+multi_byte| features}
|
|
|
4619 List of font names to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|.
|
|
|
4620 See |pmbfn-option|.
|
|
7
|
4621
|
|
|
4622 *'printoptions'* *'popt'*
|
|
|
4623 'printoptions' 'popt' string (default "")
|
|
|
4624 global
|
|
|
4625 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4626 {only available when compiled with |+printer| feature}
|
|
15
|
4627 List of items that control the format of the output of |:hardcopy|.
|
|
|
4628 See |popt-option|.
|
|
|
4629
|
|
12
|
4630 *'quoteescape''* *'qe'*
|
|
|
4631 'quoteescape' 'qe' string (default "\")
|
|
|
4632 local to buffer
|
|
|
4633 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4634 The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string. Used for
|
|
|
4635 objects like a', a" and a` |a'|.
|
|
|
4636 When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string,
|
|
|
4637 the following character will be skipped. The default value makes the
|
|
|
4638 text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string.
|
|
|
4639
|
|
7
|
4640 *'readonly'* *'ro'* *'noreadonly'* *'noro'*
|
|
|
4641 'readonly' 'ro' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
4642 local to buffer
|
|
|
4643 If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'. Protects you from
|
|
|
4644 accidentally overwriting a file. Default on when Vim is started
|
|
|
4645 in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view".
|
|
|
4646 {not in Vi:} When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is
|
|
|
4647 set for the newly edited buffer. When using ":w!" the 'readonly'
|
|
|
4648 option is reset for the current buffer.
|
|
|
4649
|
|
|
4650 *'remap'* *'noremap'*
|
|
|
4651 'remap' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
4652 global
|
|
|
4653 Allows for mappings to work recursively. If you do not want this for
|
|
|
4654 a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command.
|
|
|
4655
|
|
|
4656 *'report'*
|
|
|
4657 'report' number (default 2)
|
|
|
4658 global
|
|
|
4659 Threshold for reporting number of lines changed. When the number of
|
|
|
4660 changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most
|
|
|
4661 ":" commands. If you want it always, set 'report' to 0.
|
|
|
4662 For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used
|
|
|
4663 instead of the number of lines.
|
|
|
4664
|
|
|
4665 *'restorescreen'* *'rs'* *'norestorescreen'* *'nors'*
|
|
|
4666 'restorescreen' 'rs' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
4667 global
|
|
|
4668 {not in Vi} {only in Windows 95/NT console version}
|
|
|
4669 When set, the screen contents is restored when exiting Vim. This also
|
|
|
4670 happens when executing external commands.
|
|
|
4671
|
|
|
4672 For non-Windows Vim: You can set or reset the 't_ti' and 't_te'
|
|
|
4673 options in your .vimrc. To disable restoring:
|
|
|
4674 set t_ti= t_te=
|
|
|
4675 To enable restoring (for an xterm):
|
|
|
4676 set t_ti=^[7^[[r^[[?47h t_te=^[[?47l^[8
|
|
|
4677 (Where ^[ is an <Esc>, type CTRL-V <Esc> to insert it)
|
|
|
4678
|
|
|
4679 *'revins'* *'ri'* *'norevins'* *'nori'*
|
|
|
4680 'revins' 'ri' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
4681 global
|
|
|
4682 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4683 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
|
4684 feature}
|
|
|
4685 Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards. See "typing
|
|
|
4686 backwards" |ins-reverse|. This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_
|
|
|
4687 command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set.
|
|
|
4688 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' or 'paste' is set.
|
|
|
4689
|
|
|
4690 *'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'*
|
|
|
4691 'rightleft' 'rl' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
4692 local to window
|
|
|
4693 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4694 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
|
4695 feature}
|
|
|
4696 When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters
|
|
|
4697 that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left.
|
|
|
4698 Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that
|
|
|
4699 are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic.
|
|
|
4700 This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files
|
|
|
4701 simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is
|
|
|
4702 useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left
|
|
|
4703 and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly
|
|
|
4704 in different windows). Also see |rileft.txt|.
|
|
|
4705
|
|
|
4706 *'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'* *'norightleftcmd'* *'norlc'*
|
|
|
4707 'rightleftcmd' 'rlc' string (default "search")
|
|
|
4708 local to window
|
|
|
4709 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4710 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
|
4711 feature}
|
|
|
4712 Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in
|
|
|
4713 right-to-left mode for a group of commands:
|
|
|
4714
|
|
|
4715 search "/" and "?" commands
|
|
|
4716
|
|
|
4717 This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi.
|
|
|
4718 The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.
|
|
|
4719
|
|
|
4720 *'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'*
|
|
|
4721 'ruler' 'ru' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
4722 global
|
|
|
4723 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4724 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
|
4725 |+cmdline_info| feature}
|
|
|
4726 Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a
|
|
10
|
4727 comma. When there is room, the relative position of the displayed
|
|
7
|
4728 text in the file is shown on the far right:
|
|
|
4729 Top first line is visible
|
|
|
4730 Bot last line is visible
|
|
|
4731 All first and last line are visible
|
|
|
4732 45% relative position in the file
|
|
|
4733 If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler.
|
|
10
|
4734 Each window has its own ruler. If a window has a status line, the
|
|
7
|
4735 ruler is shown there. Otherwise it is shown in the last line of the
|
|
|
4736 screen. If the statusline is given by 'statusline' (ie. not empty),
|
|
|
4737 this option takes precedence over 'ruler' and 'rulerformat'
|
|
|
4738 If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of
|
|
|
4739 bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multi-byte character), both
|
|
|
4740 the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown,
|
|
|
4741 separated with a dash.
|
|
|
4742 For an empty line "0-1" is shown.
|
|
|
4743 For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1".
|
|
|
4744 This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
|
|
|
4745 If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where
|
|
|
4746 you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|.
|
|
|
4747 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
4748
|
|
|
4749 *'rulerformat'* *'ruf'*
|
|
|
4750 'rulerformat' 'ruf' string (default empty)
|
|
|
4751 global
|
|
|
4752 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4753 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
|
|
|
4754 feature}
|
|
|
4755 When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler
|
|
|
4756 string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option.
|
|
|
4757 The format of this option, is like that of 'statusline'.
|
|
|
4758 The default ruler width is 17 characters. To make the ruler 15
|
|
|
4759 characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end.
|
|
|
4760 Example: >
|
|
|
4761 :set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%)
|
|
|
4762 <
|
|
|
4763 *'runtimepath'* *'rtp'* *vimfiles*
|
|
|
4764 'runtimepath' 'rtp' string (default:
|
|
|
4765 Unix: "$HOME/.vim,
|
|
|
4766 $VIM/vimfiles,
|
|
|
4767 $VIMRUNTIME,
|
|
|
4768 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
|
|
|
4769 $HOME/.vim/after"
|
|
|
4770 Amiga: "home:vimfiles,
|
|
|
4771 $VIM/vimfiles,
|
|
|
4772 $VIMRUNTIME,
|
|
|
4773 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
|
|
|
4774 home:vimfiles/after"
|
|
|
4775 PC, OS/2: "$HOME/vimfiles,
|
|
|
4776 $VIM/vimfiles,
|
|
|
4777 $VIMRUNTIME,
|
|
|
4778 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
|
|
|
4779 $HOME/vimfiles/after"
|
|
|
4780 Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles,
|
|
|
4781 $VIMRUNTIME,
|
|
|
4782 $VIM:vimfiles:after"
|
|
|
4783 RISC-OS: "Choices:vimfiles,
|
|
|
4784 $VIMRUNTIME,
|
|
|
4785 Choices:vimfiles/after"
|
|
|
4786 VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles,
|
|
|
4787 $VIM/vimfiles,
|
|
|
4788 $VIMRUNTIME,
|
|
|
4789 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
|
|
|
4790 sys$login:vimfiles/after"
|
|
|
4791 global
|
|
|
4792 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4793 This is a list of directories which will be searched for runtime
|
|
|
4794 files:
|
|
|
4795 filetype.vim filetypes by file name |new-filetype|
|
|
|
4796 scripts.vim filetypes by file contents |new-filetype-scripts|
|
|
|
4797 colors/ color scheme files |:colorscheme|
|
|
|
4798 compiler/ compiler files |:compiler|
|
|
|
4799 doc/ documentation |write-local-help|
|
|
|
4800 ftplugin/ filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin|
|
|
|
4801 indent/ indent scripts |indent-expression|
|
|
|
4802 keymap/ key mapping files |mbyte-keymap|
|
|
|
4803 lang/ menu translations |:menutrans|
|
|
|
4804 menu.vim GUI menus |menu.vim|
|
|
|
4805 plugin/ plugin scripts |write-plugin|
|
|
|
4806 print/ files for printing |postscript-print-encoding|
|
|
|
4807 syntax/ syntax files |mysyntaxfile|
|
|
|
4808 tutor/ files for vimtutor |tutor|
|
|
|
4809
|
|
|
4810 And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command.
|
|
|
4811
|
|
|
4812 The defaults for most systems are setup to search five locations:
|
|
|
4813 1. In your home directory, for your personal preferences.
|
|
|
4814 2. In a system-wide Vim directory, for preferences from the system
|
|
|
4815 administrator.
|
|
|
4816 3. In $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Vim.
|
|
|
4817 *after-directory*
|
|
|
4818 4. In the "after" directory in the system-wide Vim directory. This is
|
|
|
4819 for the system administrator to overrule or add to the distributed
|
|
|
4820 defaults (rarely needed)
|
|
|
4821 5. In the "after" directory in your home directory. This is for
|
|
|
4822 personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults
|
|
|
4823 or system-wide settings (rarely needed).
|
|
|
4824
|
|
|
4825 Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed. Normal
|
|
|
4826 wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for
|
|
10
|
4827 runtime files. For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid
|
|
7
|
4828 wildcards.
|
|
|
4829 See |:runtime|.
|
|
|
4830 Example: >
|
|
|
4831 :set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME
|
|
|
4832 < This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your
|
|
|
4833 personal Vim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim" (shared between a
|
|
|
4834 group of people) and finally "$VIMRUNTIME" (the distributed runtime
|
|
|
4835 files).
|
|
|
4836 You probably should always include $VIMRUNTIME somewhere, to use the
|
|
|
4837 distributed runtime files. You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME
|
|
|
4838 to find files which replace a distributed runtime files. You can put
|
|
|
4839 a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed
|
|
|
4840 runtime files.
|
|
|
4841 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
4842 security reasons.
|
|
|
4843
|
|
|
4844 *'scroll'* *'scr'*
|
|
|
4845 'scroll' 'scr' number (default: half the window height)
|
|
|
4846 local to window
|
|
|
4847 Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands. Will be
|
|
|
4848 set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size
|
|
|
4849 changes. If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will
|
|
10
|
4850 be used as the new value for 'scroll'. Reset to half the window
|
|
7
|
4851 height with ":set scroll=0". {Vi is a bit different: 'scroll' gives
|
|
|
4852 the number of screen lines instead of file lines, makes a difference
|
|
|
4853 when lines wrap}
|
|
|
4854
|
|
|
4855 *'scrollbind'* *'scb'* *'noscrollbind'* *'noscb'*
|
|
|
4856 'scrollbind' 'scb' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
4857 local to window
|
|
|
4858 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4859 {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
|
|
|
4860 feature}
|
|
|
4861 See also |scroll-binding|. When this option is set, the current
|
|
|
4862 window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have
|
|
|
4863 this option set) scroll. This option is useful for viewing the
|
|
|
4864 differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'.
|
|
|
4865 See |'scrollopt'| for options that determine how this option should be
|
|
|
4866 interpreted.
|
|
|
4867 This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another
|
|
|
4868 file. This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows
|
|
|
4869 with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not.
|
|
|
4870
|
|
|
4871 *'scrolljump'* *'sj'*
|
|
|
4872 'scrolljump' 'sj' number (default 1)
|
|
|
4873 global
|
|
|
4874 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4875 Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the
|
|
|
4876 screen (e.g., with "j"). Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E,
|
|
|
4877 CTRL-D). Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly.
|
|
|
4878 NOTE: This option is set to 1 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
4879
|
|
|
4880 *'scrolloff'* *'so'*
|
|
|
4881 'scrolloff' 'so' number (default 0)
|
|
|
4882 global
|
|
|
4883 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4884 Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor.
|
|
|
4885 This will make some context visible around where you are working. If
|
|
|
4886 you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be
|
|
|
4887 in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or
|
|
|
4888 when long lines wrap).
|
|
|
4889 For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'.
|
|
|
4890 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
4891
|
|
|
4892 *'scrollopt'* *'sbo'*
|
|
|
4893 'scrollopt' 'sbo' string (default "ver,jump")
|
|
|
4894 global
|
|
|
4895 {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
|
|
|
4896 feature}
|
|
|
4897 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4898 This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how
|
|
|
4899 'scrollbind' windows should behave.
|
|
|
4900 The following words are available:
|
|
|
4901 ver Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
|
|
|
4902 hor Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
|
|
|
4903 jump Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical
|
|
|
4904 scrolling. This offset is the difference in the first
|
|
|
4905 displayed line of the bound windows. When moving
|
|
|
4906 around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may
|
|
|
4907 reach a position before the start or after the end of
|
|
|
4908 the buffer. The offset is not changed though, when
|
|
|
4909 moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll
|
|
|
4910 to the desired position when possible.
|
|
|
4911 When now making that window the current one, two
|
|
|
4912 things can be done with the relative offset:
|
|
|
4913 1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is
|
|
|
4914 adjusted for the scroll position in the new current
|
|
|
4915 window. When going back to the other window, the
|
|
|
4916 the new relative offset will be used.
|
|
|
4917 2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are
|
|
|
4918 scrolled to keep the same relative offset. When
|
|
|
4919 going back to the other window, it still uses the
|
|
|
4920 same relative offset.
|
|
|
4921 Also see |scroll-binding|.
|
|
|
4922
|
|
|
4923 *'sections'* *'sect'*
|
|
|
4924 'sections' 'sect' string (default "SHNHH HUnhsh")
|
|
|
4925 global
|
|
|
4926 Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections. These are pairs of
|
|
|
4927 two letters (See |object-motions|). The default makes a section start
|
|
|
4928 at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh".
|
|
|
4929
|
|
|
4930 *'secure'* *'nosecure'* *E523*
|
|
|
4931 'secure' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
4932 global
|
|
|
4933 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4934 When on, ":autocmd", shell and write commands are not allowed in
|
|
|
4935 ".vimrc" and ".exrc" in the current directory and map commands are
|
|
|
4936 displayed. Switch it off only if you know that you will not run into
|
|
|
4937 problems, or when the 'exrc' option is off. On Unix this option is
|
|
|
4938 only used if the ".vimrc" or ".exrc" is not owned by you. This can be
|
|
10
|
4939 dangerous if the systems allows users to do a "chown". You better set
|
|
7
|
4940 'secure' at the end of your ~/.vimrc then.
|
|
|
4941 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
4942 security reasons.
|
|
|
4943
|
|
|
4944 *'selection'* *'sel'*
|
|
|
4945 'selection' 'sel' string (default "inclusive")
|
|
|
4946 global
|
|
|
4947 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4948 This option defines the behavior of the selection. It is only used
|
|
|
4949 in Visual and Select mode.
|
|
|
4950 Possible values:
|
|
|
4951 value past line inclusive ~
|
|
|
4952 old no yes
|
|
|
4953 inclusive yes yes
|
|
|
4954 exclusive yes no
|
|
|
4955 "past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one
|
|
|
4956 character past the line.
|
|
|
4957 "inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included
|
|
|
4958 in an operation. For example, when "x" is used to delete the
|
|
|
4959 selection.
|
|
|
4960 Note that when "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end
|
|
|
4961 backwards, you cannot include the last character of a line, when
|
|
|
4962 starting in Normal mode and 'virtualedit' empty.
|
|
|
4963
|
|
|
4964 The 'selection' option is set by the |:behave| command.
|
|
|
4965
|
|
|
4966 *'selectmode'* *'slm'*
|
|
|
4967 'selectmode' 'slm' string (default "")
|
|
|
4968 global
|
|
|
4969 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4970 This is a comma separated list of words, which specifies when to start
|
|
|
4971 Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started.
|
|
|
4972 Possible values:
|
|
|
4973 mouse when using the mouse
|
|
|
4974 key when using shifted special keys
|
|
|
4975 cmd when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V
|
|
|
4976 See |Select-mode|.
|
|
|
4977 The 'selectmode' option is set by the |:behave| command.
|
|
|
4978
|
|
|
4979 *'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'*
|
|
|
4980 'sessionoptions' 'ssop' string (default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds,
|
|
|
4981 help,options,winsize")
|
|
|
4982 global
|
|
|
4983 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
4984 {not available when compiled without the +mksession
|
|
|
4985 feature}
|
|
|
4986 Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command. It is a comma
|
|
|
4987 separated list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring
|
|
|
4988 something:
|
|
|
4989 word save and restore ~
|
|
|
4990 blank empty windows
|
|
|
4991 buffers hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows
|
|
|
4992 curdir the current directory
|
|
|
4993 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
|
|
|
4994 fold options
|
|
|
4995 globals global variables that start with an uppercase letter
|
|
|
4996 and contain at least one lowercase letter.
|
|
|
4997 help the help window
|
|
|
4998 localoptions options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
|
|
|
4999 global values for local options)
|
|
|
5000 options all options and mappings (also global values for local
|
|
|
5001 options)
|
|
|
5002 resize size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns'
|
|
|
5003 sesdir the directory in which the session file is located
|
|
|
5004 will become the current directory (useful with
|
|
|
5005 projects accessed over a network from different
|
|
|
5006 systems)
|
|
|
5007 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward
|
|
|
5008 slashes
|
|
|
5009 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
|
|
|
5010 on Windows or DOS
|
|
|
5011 winpos position of the whole Vim window
|
|
|
5012 winsize window sizes
|
|
|
5013
|
|
|
5014 Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir".
|
|
|
5015 When "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored with
|
|
|
5016 absolute paths.
|
|
|
5017 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files
|
|
|
5018 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
|
|
|
5019 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.
|
|
|
5020
|
|
|
5021 *'shell'* *'sh'* *E91*
|
|
|
5022 'shell' 'sh' string (default $SHELL or "sh",
|
|
|
5023 MS-DOS and Win32: "command.com" or
|
|
|
5024 "cmd.exe", OS/2: "cmd")
|
|
|
5025 global
|
|
|
5026 Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands. When changing the
|
|
|
5027 value also check these options: 'shelltype', 'shellpipe', 'shellslash'
|
|
|
5028 'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'.
|
|
10
|
5029 It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g. "csh -f".
|
|
7
|
5030 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
|
5031 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
|
5032 If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose
|
|
|
5033 it in quotes. Example: >
|
|
|
5034 :set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f
|
|
|
5035 < Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and
|
|
10
|
5036 each space (to avoid ending the option value). Also note that the
|
|
7
|
5037 "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command
|
|
|
5038 name. And Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path
|
|
|
5039 separators.
|
|
|
5040 For Dos 32 bits (DJGPP), you can set the $DJSYSFLAGS environment
|
|
|
5041 variable to change the way external commands are executed. See the
|
|
|
5042 libc.inf file of DJGPP.
|
|
|
5043 Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be
|
|
|
5044 included. Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com"
|
|
|
5045 works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g.,
|
|
|
5046 filtering).
|
|
|
5047 For unknown reasons, when using "4dos.com" the current directory is
|
|
|
5048 changed to "C:\". To avoid this set 'shell' like this: >
|
|
|
5049 :set shell=command.com\ /c\ 4dos
|
|
|
5050 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
5051 security reasons.
|
|
|
5052
|
|
|
5053 *'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'*
|
|
|
5054 'shellcmdflag' 'shcf' string (default: "-c", MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
|
|
|
5055 does not contain "sh" somewhere: "/c")
|
|
|
5056 global
|
|
|
5057 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5058 Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,
|
|
|
5059 "bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir". For the MS-DOS-like
|
|
|
5060 systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to
|
|
|
5061 reduce the need to set this option by the user. It's not used for
|
|
|
5062 OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself). See |option-backslash| about
|
|
|
5063 including spaces and backslashes. See |dos-shell|.
|
|
|
5064 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
5065 security reasons.
|
|
|
5066
|
|
|
5067 *'shellpipe'* *'sp'*
|
|
|
5068 'shellpipe' 'sp' string (default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee")
|
|
|
5069 global
|
|
|
5070 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5071 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
|
|
5072 feature}
|
|
|
5073 String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the
|
|
10
|
5074 error file. See also |:make_makeprg|. See |option-backslash| about
|
|
7
|
5075 including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
|
5076 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
|
|
|
5077 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
|
|
|
5078 of this option).
|
|
|
5079 For the Amiga and MS-DOS the default is ">". The output is directly
|
|
|
5080 saved in a file and not echoed to the screen.
|
|
|
5081 For Unix the default it "| tee". The stdout of the compiler is saved
|
|
|
5082 in a file and echoed to the screen. If the 'shell' option is "csh" or
|
|
|
5083 "tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee". If the
|
|
|
5084 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "zsh" or "bash" the default becomes
|
|
|
5085 "2>&1| tee". This means that stderr is also included.
|
|
|
5086 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
|
|
|
5087 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
|
|
|
5088 there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was
|
|
|
5089 explicitly set before.
|
|
|
5090 When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the
|
|
|
5091 ":make" output will be done. This is useful if you use a 'makeprg'
|
|
|
5092 that writes to 'makeef' by itself. If you want no piping, but do
|
|
|
5093 want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space.
|
|
|
5094 Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ".
|
|
|
5095 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
|
|
|
5096 become obsolete (at least for Unix).
|
|
|
5097 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
5098 security reasons.
|
|
|
5099
|
|
|
5100 *'shellquote'* *'shq'*
|
|
|
5101 'shellquote' 'shq' string (default: ""; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
|
|
|
5102 contains "sh" somewhere: "\"")
|
|
|
5103 global
|
|
|
5104 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5105 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
|
|
|
5106 the "!" and ":!" commands. The redirection is kept outside of the
|
|
|
5107 quoting. See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection. It's
|
|
|
5108 probably not useful to set both options.
|
|
|
5109 This is an empty string by default. Only known to be useful for
|
|
|
5110 third-party shells on MS-DOS-like systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell
|
|
|
5111 or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted according
|
|
|
5112 the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the
|
|
|
5113 user. See |dos-shell|.
|
|
|
5114 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
5115 security reasons.
|
|
|
5116
|
|
|
5117 *'shellredir'* *'srr'*
|
|
|
5118 'shellredir' 'srr' string (default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1")
|
|
|
5119 global
|
|
|
5120 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5121 String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary
|
|
|
5122 file. See also |:!|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces
|
|
|
5123 and backslashes.
|
|
|
5124 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
|
|
|
5125 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
|
|
|
5126 of this option).
|
|
|
5127 The default is ">". For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh", "tcsh"
|
|
|
5128 or "zsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&". If the
|
|
|
5129 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh" or "bash" the default becomes
|
|
|
5130 ">%s 2>&1". This means that stderr is also included.
|
|
|
5131 For Win32, the Unix checks are done and additionally "cmd" is checked
|
|
|
5132 for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1". Also, the same names with
|
|
|
5133 ".exe" appended are checked for.
|
|
|
5134 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
|
|
|
5135 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
|
|
|
5136 there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was
|
|
|
5137 explicitly set before.
|
|
|
5138 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
|
|
|
5139 become obsolete (at least for Unix).
|
|
|
5140 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
5141 security reasons.
|
|
|
5142
|
|
|
5143 *'shellslash'* *'ssl'* *'noshellslash'* *'nossl'*
|
|
|
5144 'shellslash' 'ssl' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
5145 global
|
|
|
5146 {not in Vi} {only for MSDOS, MS-Windows and OS/2}
|
|
|
5147 When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names. This is
|
|
|
5148 useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of command.com or
|
|
|
5149 cmd.exe. Backward slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to
|
|
|
5150 forward slashes by Vim.
|
|
|
5151 Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some
|
|
|
5152 existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening
|
|
|
5153 any file for best results. This might change in the future.
|
|
|
5154 'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path
|
|
|
5155 separator. To test if this is so use: >
|
|
|
5156 if exists('+shellslash')
|
|
|
5157 <
|
|
|
5158 *'shelltype'* *'st'*
|
|
|
5159 'shelltype' 'st' number (default 0)
|
|
|
5160 global
|
|
|
5161 {not in Vi} {only for the Amiga}
|
|
|
5162 On the Amiga this option influences the way how the commands work
|
|
|
5163 which use a shell.
|
|
|
5164 0 and 1: always use the shell
|
|
|
5165 2 and 3: use the shell only to filter lines
|
|
|
5166 4 and 5: use shell only for ':sh' command
|
|
|
5167 When not using the shell, the command is executed directly.
|
|
|
5168
|
|
|
5169 0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands
|
|
|
5170 1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands
|
|
|
5171
|
|
|
5172 *'shellxquote'* *'sxq'*
|
|
|
5173 'shellxquote' 'sxq' string (default: "";
|
|
|
5174 for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh"
|
|
|
5175 somewhere: "\""
|
|
|
5176 for Unix, when using system(): "\"")
|
|
|
5177 global
|
|
|
5178 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5179 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
|
|
|
5180 the "!" and ":!" commands. Includes the redirection. See
|
|
|
5181 'shellquote' to exclude the redirection. It's probably not useful
|
|
|
5182 to set both options.
|
|
|
5183 This is an empty string by default. Known to be useful for
|
|
|
5184 third-party shells when using the Win32 version, such as the MKS Korn
|
|
|
5185 Shell or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted
|
|
|
5186 according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option
|
|
|
5187 by the user. See |dos-shell|.
|
|
|
5188 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
5189 security reasons.
|
|
|
5190
|
|
|
5191 *'shiftround'* *'sr'* *'noshiftround'* *'nosr'*
|
|
|
5192 'shiftround' 'sr' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
5193 global
|
|
|
5194 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5195 Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'. Applies to > and <
|
|
|
5196 commands. CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to
|
|
|
5197 a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible).
|
|
|
5198 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
5199
|
|
|
5200 *'shiftwidth'* *'sw'*
|
|
|
5201 'shiftwidth' 'sw' number (default 8)
|
|
|
5202 local to buffer
|
|
10
|
5203 Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent. Used for
|
|
7
|
5204 |'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc.
|
|
|
5205
|
|
|
5206 *'shortmess'* *'shm'*
|
|
|
5207 'shortmess' 'shm' string (Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "")
|
|
|
5208 global
|
|
|
5209 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5210 This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file
|
|
|
5211 messages, for example with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages.
|
|
|
5212 It is a list of flags:
|
|
|
5213 flag meaning when present ~
|
|
|
5214 f use "(3 of 5)" instead of "(file 3 of 5)"
|
|
|
5215 i use "[noeol]" instead of "[Incomplete last line]"
|
|
|
5216 l use "999L, 888C" instead of "999 lines, 888 characters"
|
|
|
5217 m use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]"
|
|
|
5218 n use "[New]" instead of "[New File]"
|
|
|
5219 r use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]"
|
|
|
5220 w use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message
|
|
|
5221 and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command
|
|
|
5222 x use "[dos]" instead of "[dos format]", "[unix]" instead of
|
|
|
5223 "[unix format]" and "[mac]" instead of "[mac format]".
|
|
|
5224 a all of the above abbreviations
|
|
|
5225
|
|
|
5226 o overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent message
|
|
|
5227 for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when 'autowrite' on)
|
|
|
5228 O message for reading a file overwrites any previous message.
|
|
|
5229 Also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn").
|
|
|
5230 s don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or "search
|
|
|
5231 hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages
|
|
|
5232 t truncate file message at the start if it is too long to fit
|
|
|
5233 on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most column.
|
|
|
5234 Ignored in Ex mode.
|
|
|
5235 T truncate other messages in the middle if they are too long to
|
|
|
5236 fit on the command line. "..." will appear in the middle.
|
|
|
5237 Ignored in Ex mode.
|
|
|
5238 W don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file
|
|
|
5239 A don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file
|
|
|
5240 is found.
|
|
|
5241 I don't give the intro message when starting Vim |:intro|.
|
|
|
5242
|
|
|
5243 This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
|
|
|
5244 requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
|
|
|
5245 possible for the space available. To get the whole message that you
|
|
|
5246 would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!"
|
|
|
5247 Useful values:
|
|
|
5248 shm= No abbreviation of message.
|
|
|
5249 shm=a Abbreviation, but no loss of information.
|
|
|
5250 shm=at Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary.
|
|
|
5251
|
|
|
5252 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
5253 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
5254
|
|
|
5255 *'shortname'* *'sn'* *'noshortname'* *'nosn'*
|
|
|
5256 'shortname' 'sn' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
5257 local to buffer
|
|
|
5258 {not in Vi, not in MS-DOS versions}
|
|
|
5259 Filenames are assumed to be 8 characters plus one extension of 3
|
|
|
5260 characters. Multiple dots in file names are not allowed. When this
|
|
|
5261 option is on, dots in file names are replaced with underscores when
|
|
|
5262 adding an extension (".~" or ".swp"). This option is not available
|
|
|
5263 for MS-DOS, because then it would always be on. This option is useful
|
|
|
5264 when editing files on an MS-DOS compatible filesystem, e.g., messydos
|
|
|
5265 or crossdos. When running the Win32 GUI version under Win32s, this
|
|
|
5266 option is always on by default.
|
|
|
5267
|
|
|
5268 *'showbreak'* *'sbr'* *E595*
|
|
|
5269 'showbreak' 'sbr' string (default "")
|
|
|
5270 global
|
|
|
5271 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5272 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
|
|
|
5273 feature}
|
|
|
5274 String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped. Useful
|
|
|
5275 values are "> " or "+++ ".
|
|
|
5276 Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and
|
|
|
5277 comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the
|
|
|
5278 part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line).
|
|
|
5279 The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in
|
|
|
5280 'highlight'.
|
|
|
5281 Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently.
|
|
|
5282 If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the
|
|
|
5283 "n" flag to 'cpoptions'.
|
|
|
5284
|
|
|
5285 *'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'*
|
|
|
5286 'showcmd' 'sc' boolean (Vim default: on, off for Unix, Vi default:
|
|
|
5287 off)
|
|
|
5288 global
|
|
|
5289 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5290 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
|
5291 |+cmdline_info| feature}
|
|
10
|
5292 Show (partial) command in status line. Set this option off if your
|
|
7
|
5293 terminal is slow.
|
|
|
5294 In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown:
|
|
|
5295 - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters.
|
|
|
5296 - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines.
|
|
|
5297 - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters: linesxcolumns.
|
|
|
5298 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
5299 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
5300
|
|
|
5301 *'showfulltag'* *'sft'* *'noshowfulltag'* *'nosft'*
|
|
|
5302 'showfulltag' 'sft' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
5303 global
|
|
|
5304 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5305 When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the
|
|
|
5306 tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search
|
|
10
|
5307 pattern (if there is one) as possible matches. Thus, if you have
|
|
7
|
5308 matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are
|
|
|
5309 required (coding style permitting).
|
|
|
5310
|
|
|
5311 *'showmatch'* *'sm'* *'noshowmatch'* *'nosm'*
|
|
|
5312 'showmatch' 'sm' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
5313 global
|
|
|
5314 When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one. The
|
|
|
5315 jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen. The time to
|
|
|
5316 show the match can be set with 'matchtime'.
|
|
|
5317 A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be
|
|
|
5318 seen or not). This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
|
|
|
5319 When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character
|
|
|
5320 will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs.
|
|
|
5321 See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and
|
|
|
5322 blinking when showing the match.
|
|
|
5323 The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show
|
|
|
5324 matches for. 'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite
|
|
|
5325 matches.
|
|
|
5326 Note: For the use of the short form parental guidance is advised.
|
|
|
5327
|
|
|
5328 *'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'*
|
|
|
5329 'showmode' 'smd' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
|
|
5330 global
|
|
|
5331 If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line.
|
|
|
5332 Use the 'M' flag in 'highlight' to set the type of highlighting for
|
|
|
5333 this message.
|
|
10
|
5334 When |XIM| may be used the message will include "XIM". But this
|
|
7
|
5335 doesn't mean XIM is really active, especially when 'imactivatekey' is
|
|
|
5336 not set.
|
|
|
5337 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
5338 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
5339
|
|
|
5340 *'sidescroll'* *'ss'*
|
|
|
5341 'sidescroll' 'ss' number (default 0)
|
|
|
5342 global
|
|
|
5343 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5344 The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally. Used only when
|
|
|
5345 the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen.
|
|
|
5346 When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen.
|
|
|
5347 When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0. When using
|
|
|
5348 a fast terminal use a small number or 1. Not used for "zh" and "zl"
|
|
|
5349 commands.
|
|
|
5350
|
|
|
5351 *'sidescrolloff'* *'siso'*
|
|
|
5352 'sidescrolloff' 'siso' number (default 0)
|
|
|
5353 global
|
|
|
5354 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5355 The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the
|
|
|
5356 right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set. Setting this option to a value
|
|
|
5357 greater than 0 while having |'sidescroll'| also at a non-zero value
|
|
|
5358 makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in
|
|
|
5359 horizontally (except at the end and beginning of the line). Setting
|
|
|
5360 this option to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the
|
|
|
5361 cursor horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not
|
|
|
5362 come too close to the beginning or end of the line.
|
|
|
5363 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
5364
|
|
|
5365 Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as
|
|
|
5366 in the following example to never allow the cursor to move
|
|
|
5367 onto the "extends" character:
|
|
|
5368
|
|
|
5369 :set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:<
|
|
|
5370 :set sidescrolloff=1
|
|
|
5371
|
|
|
5372
|
|
|
5373 *'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'*
|
|
|
5374 'smartcase' 'scs' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
5375 global
|
|
|
5376 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5377 Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
|
|
|
5378 case characters. Only used when the search pattern is typed and
|
|
|
5379 'ignorecase' option is on. Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
|
|
10
|
5380 ":g" and ":s". Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.. After
|
|
7
|
5381 "*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command,
|
|
|
5382 recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.
|
|
|
5383 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
5384
|
|
|
5385 *'smartindent'* *'si'* *'nosmartindent'* *'nosi'*
|
|
|
5386 'smartindent' 'si' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
5387 local to buffer
|
|
|
5388 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5389 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
|
5390 |+smartindent| feature}
|
|
|
5391 Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line. Works for C-like
|
|
|
5392 programs, but can also be used for other languages. 'cindent' does
|
|
|
5393 something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict,
|
|
|
5394 see |C-indenting|. When 'cindent' is on, setting 'si' has no effect.
|
|
|
5395 'indentexpr' is a more advanced alternative.
|
|
|
5396 Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'.
|
|
|
5397 An indent is automatically inserted:
|
|
|
5398 - After a line ending in '{'.
|
|
|
5399 - After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'.
|
|
|
5400 - Before a line starting with '}' (only with the "O" command).
|
|
|
5401 When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is
|
|
|
5402 given the same indent as the matching '{'.
|
|
|
5403 When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for
|
|
|
5404 that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column. The indent
|
|
10
|
5405 is restored for the next line. If you don't want this, use this
|
|
7
|
5406 mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H.
|
|
|
5407 When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted
|
|
|
5408 right.
|
|
10
|
5409 NOTE: 'smartindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set. When 'paste'
|
|
7
|
5410 is set smart indenting is disabled.
|
|
|
5411
|
|
|
5412 *'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'*
|
|
|
5413 'smarttab' 'sta' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
5414 global
|
|
|
5415 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5416 When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to
|
|
|
5417 'shiftwidth'. 'tabstop' is used in other places. A <BS> will delete
|
|
|
5418 a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the line.
|
|
|
5419 When off a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop'.
|
|
|
5420 'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or right
|
|
|
5421 |shift-left-right|.
|
|
|
5422 What gets inserted (a Tab or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab'
|
|
|
5423 option. Also see |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the
|
|
11
|
5424 number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
|
|
7
|
5425 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
5426
|
|
|
5427 *'softtabstop'* *'sts'*
|
|
|
5428 'softtabstop' 'sts' number (default 0)
|
|
|
5429 local to buffer
|
|
|
5430 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5431 Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing
|
|
|
5432 operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>. It "feels" like
|
|
|
5433 <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is
|
|
|
5434 used. This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value
|
|
|
5435 of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'. However,
|
|
|
5436 commands like "x" still work on the actual characters.
|
|
|
5437 When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off.
|
|
|
5438 'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.
|
|
|
5439 See also |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of
|
|
|
5440 spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
|
|
|
5441 The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is
|
|
|
5442 set.
|
|
|
5443 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
5444
|
|
|
5445 *'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'*
|
|
|
5446 'splitbelow' 'sb' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
5447 global
|
|
|
5448 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5449 {not available when compiled without the +windows
|
|
|
5450 feature}
|
|
|
5451 When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current
|
|
|
5452 one. |:split|
|
|
|
5453
|
|
|
5454 *'splitright'* *'spr'* *'nosplitright'* *'nospr'*
|
|
|
5455 'splitright' 'spr' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
5456 global
|
|
|
5457 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5458 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
|
|
|
5459 feature}
|
|
|
5460 When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the
|
|
|
5461 current one. |:vsplit|
|
|
|
5462
|
|
|
5463 *'startofline'* *'sol'* *'nostartofline'* *'nosol'*
|
|
|
5464 'startofline' 'sol' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
5465 global
|
|
|
5466 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5467 When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first
|
|
11
|
5468 non-blank of the line. When off the cursor is kept in the same column
|
|
10
|
5469 (if possible). This applies to the commands: CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B,
|
|
11
|
5470 CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", gg, and to the commands "d", "<<" and ">>"
|
|
7
|
5471 with a linewise operator, with "%" with a count and to buffer changing
|
|
|
5472 commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.). Also for an Ex command that
|
|
|
5473 only has a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+".
|
|
|
5474 In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column
|
|
|
5475 where it was the last time the buffer was edited.
|
|
|
5476 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
5477
|
|
|
5478 *'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E541* *E542*
|
|
|
5479 'statusline' 'stl' string (default empty)
|
|
|
5480 global
|
|
|
5481 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5482 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
|
|
|
5483 feature}
|
|
|
5484 When nonempty, this option determines the content of the status line.
|
|
|
5485 Also see |status-line|.
|
|
|
5486
|
|
|
5487 The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with
|
|
|
5488 normal text. Each status line item is of the form:
|
|
|
5489 %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item}
|
|
|
5490 All fields except the {item} is optional. A single percent sign can
|
|
|
5491 be given as "%%". Up to 80 items can be specified.
|
|
|
5492
|
|
|
5493 Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and
|
|
|
5494 'laststatus' is 2) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|.
|
|
|
5495
|
|
|
5496 field meaning ~
|
|
|
5497 - Left justify the item. The default is right justified
|
|
|
5498 when minwid is larger than the length of the item.
|
|
|
5499 0 Leading zeroes in numeric items. Overridden by '-'.
|
|
|
5500 minwid Minimum width of the item, padding as set by '-' & '0'.
|
|
|
5501 Value must be 50 or less.
|
|
10
|
5502 maxwid Maximum width of the item. Truncation occurs with a '<'
|
|
7
|
5503 on the left for text items. Numeric items will be
|
|
|
5504 shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by '>'number
|
|
|
5505 where number is the amount of missing digits, much like
|
|
|
5506 an exponential notation.
|
|
|
5507 item A one letter code as described below.
|
|
|
5508
|
|
|
5509 Following is a description of the possible statusline items. The
|
|
|
5510 second character in "item" is the type:
|
|
|
5511 N for number
|
|
|
5512 S for string
|
|
|
5513 F for flags as described below
|
|
|
5514 - not applicable
|
|
|
5515
|
|
|
5516 item meaning ~
|
|
|
5517 f S Path to the file in the buffer, relative to current directory.
|
|
|
5518 F S Full path to the file in the buffer.
|
|
|
5519 t S File name (tail) of file in the buffer.
|
|
|
5520 m F Modified flag, text is " [+]"; " [-]" if 'modifiable' is off.
|
|
|
5521 M F Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-".
|
|
|
5522 r F Readonly flag, text is " [RO]".
|
|
|
5523 R F Readonly flag, text is ",RO".
|
|
|
5524 h F Help buffer flag, text is " [help]".
|
|
|
5525 H F Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP".
|
|
|
5526 w F Preview window flag, text is " [Preview]".
|
|
|
5527 W F Preview window flag, text is ",PRV".
|
|
|
5528 y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., " [vim]". See 'filetype'.
|
|
|
5529 Y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM". See 'filetype'.
|
|
|
5530 {not available when compiled without |+autocmd| feature}
|
|
|
5531 k S Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are
|
|
|
5532 being used: "<keymap>"
|
|
|
5533 n N Buffer number.
|
|
|
5534 b N Value of byte under cursor.
|
|
|
5535 B N As above, in hexadecimal.
|
|
|
5536 o N Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1.
|
|
|
5537 Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added)
|
|
|
5538 {not available when compiled without |+byte_offset| feature}
|
|
|
5539 O N As above, in hexadecimal.
|
|
|
5540 N N Printer page number. (Only works in the 'printheader' option.)
|
|
|
5541 l N Line number.
|
|
|
5542 L N Number of lines in buffer.
|
|
|
5543 c N Column number.
|
|
|
5544 v N Virtual column number.
|
|
10
|
5545 V N Virtual column number as -{num}. Not displayed if equal to 'c'.
|
|
7
|
5546 p N Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|.
|
|
|
5547 P S Percentage through file of displayed window. This is like the
|
|
|
5548 percentage described for 'ruler'. Always 3 in length.
|
|
|
5549 a S Argument list status as in default title. ({current} of {max})
|
|
|
5550 Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.
|
|
|
5551 { NF Evaluate expression between '{' and '}' and substitute result.
|
|
|
5552 ( - Start of item group. Can be used for setting the width and
|
|
|
5553 alignment of a section. Must be followed by %) somewhere.
|
|
|
5554 ) - End of item group. No width fields allowed.
|
|
|
5555 < - Where to truncate line if too long. Default is at the start.
|
|
|
5556 No width fields allowed.
|
|
|
5557 = - Separation point between left and right aligned items.
|
|
|
5558 No width fields allowed.
|
|
|
5559 * - Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the
|
|
|
5560 minwid field. eg. %1*. Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*.
|
|
|
5561 The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be applied
|
|
|
5562 to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows.
|
|
|
5563 The number N must be between 1 and 9. See |hl-User1..9|
|
|
|
5564
|
|
|
5565 Display of flags are controlled by the following heuristic:
|
|
|
5566 If a flag text starts with comma it is assumed that it wants to
|
|
10
|
5567 separate itself from anything but preceding plaintext. If it starts
|
|
7
|
5568 with a space it is assumed that it wants to separate itself from
|
|
|
5569 anything but other flags. That is: A leading comma is removed if the
|
|
|
5570 preceding character stems from plaintext. A leading space is removed
|
|
|
5571 if the preceding character stems from another active flag. This will
|
|
|
5572 make a nice display when flags are used like in the examples below.
|
|
|
5573
|
|
|
5574 When all items in a group becomes an empty string (ie. flags that are
|
|
|
5575 not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will
|
|
|
5576 become empty. This will make a group like the following disappear
|
|
|
5577 completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. >
|
|
|
5578 :set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)...
|
|
|
5579 <
|
|
|
5580 Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status
|
|
|
5581 line is displayed. The current buffer and current window will be set
|
|
|
5582 temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is
|
|
|
5583 currently being drawn. The expression will evaluate in this context.
|
|
|
5584 The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the
|
|
|
5585 real current buffer. The expression is evaluated in the |sandbox|.
|
|
|
5586
|
|
|
5587 If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting
|
|
|
5588 a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by
|
|
|
5589 setting an option without changing its value. Example: >
|
|
|
5590 :let &ro = &ro
|
|
|
5591
|
|
|
5592 < A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes.
|
|
|
5593 Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules
|
|
|
5594 described above.
|
|
|
5595
|
|
|
5596 Watch out for errors in expressions. They may render Vim unusable !
|
|
|
5597 If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and
|
|
|
5598 edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim -u NONE" to get it right.
|
|
|
5599
|
|
|
5600 Examples:
|
|
|
5601 Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set >
|
|
|
5602 :set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P
|
|
|
5603 < Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") >
|
|
|
5604 :set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P
|
|
|
5605 < Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. >
|
|
|
5606 :set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b'
|
|
|
5607 :hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red
|
|
|
5608 < Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded >
|
|
|
5609 :set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h...
|
|
|
5610 < In the |:autocmd|'s: >
|
|
|
5611 :let b:gzflag = 1
|
|
|
5612 < And: >
|
|
|
5613 :unlet b:gzflag
|
|
|
5614 < And define this function: >
|
|
|
5615 :function VarExists(var, val)
|
|
|
5616 : if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif
|
|
|
5617 :endfunction
|
|
|
5618 <
|
|
|
5619 *'suffixes'* *'su'*
|
|
|
5620 'suffixes' 'su' string (default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj")
|
|
|
5621 global
|
|
|
5622 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5623 Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files
|
|
|
5624 match a wildcard. See |suffixes|. Commas can be used to separate the
|
|
10
|
5625 suffixes. Spaces after the comma are ignored. A dot is also seen as
|
|
|
5626 the start of a suffix. To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a
|
|
7
|
5627 separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about
|
|
|
5628 including spaces and backslashes).
|
|
|
5629 See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files.
|
|
|
5630 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
|
5631 suffixes from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
|
5632 uses another default.
|
|
|
5633
|
|
|
5634 *'suffixesadd'* *'sua'*
|
|
|
5635 'suffixesadd' 'sua' string (default "")
|
|
|
5636 local to buffer
|
|
|
5637 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5638 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
|
5639 |+file_in_path| feature}
|
|
|
5640 Comma separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a
|
|
|
5641 file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands. Example: >
|
|
|
5642 :set suffixesadd=.java
|
|
|
5643 <
|
|
|
5644 *'swapfile'* *'swf'* *'noswapfile'* *'noswf'*
|
|
|
5645 'swapfile' 'swf' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
5646 local to buffer
|
|
|
5647 {not in Vi}
|
|
10
|
5648 Use a swapfile for the buffer. This option can be reset when a
|
|
7
|
5649 swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer. For example, with
|
|
|
5650 confidential information that even root must not be able to access.
|
|
|
5651 Careful: All text will be in memory:
|
|
|
5652 - Don't use this for big files.
|
|
|
5653 - Recovery will be impossible!
|
|
|
5654 A swapfile will only be present when |'updatecount'| is non-zero and
|
|
|
5655 'swapfile' is set.
|
|
|
5656 When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is
|
|
|
5657 immediately deleted. When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is
|
|
|
5658 non-zero, a swap file is immediately created.
|
|
|
5659 Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|.
|
|
|
5660
|
|
|
5661 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to
|
|
|
5662 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
|
|
|
5663
|
|
|
5664 *'swapsync'* *'sws'*
|
|
|
5665 'swapsync' 'sws' string (default "fsync")
|
|
|
5666 global
|
|
|
5667 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5668 When this option is not empty a swap file is synced to disk after
|
|
10
|
5669 writing to it. This takes some time, especially on busy unix systems.
|
|
7
|
5670 When this option is empty parts of the swap file may be in memory and
|
|
|
5671 not written to disk. When the system crashes you may lose more work.
|
|
|
5672 On Unix the system does a sync now and then without Vim asking for it,
|
|
|
5673 so the disadvantage of setting this option off is small. On some
|
|
|
5674 systems the swap file will not be written at all. For a unix system
|
|
|
5675 setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default
|
|
|
5676 fsync(), which may work better on some systems.
|
|
36
|
5677 The 'fsync' option is used for the actual file.
|
|
7
|
5678
|
|
|
5679 *'switchbuf'* *'swb'*
|
|
|
5680 'switchbuf' 'swb' string (default "")
|
|
|
5681 global
|
|
|
5682 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5683 This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers.
|
|
|
5684 Possible values (comma separated list):
|
|
|
5685 useopen If included, jump to the first open window that
|
|
|
5686 contains the specified buffer (if there is one).
|
|
|
5687 Otherwise: Do not examine other windows.
|
|
|
5688 This setting is checked with |quickfix| commands, when
|
|
|
5689 jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.). It is
|
|
|
5690 also used in all buffer related split commands, for
|
|
|
5691 example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind".
|
|
|
5692 split If included, split the current window before loading
|
|
|
5693 a buffer. Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
|
|
|
5694 Supported in |quickfix| commands that display errors.
|
|
|
5695
|
|
|
5696 *'syntax'* *'syn'*
|
|
|
5697 'syntax' 'syn' string (default empty)
|
|
|
5698 local to buffer
|
|
|
5699 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5700 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
|
|
|
5701 feature}
|
|
|
5702 When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless
|
|
|
5703 syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off".
|
|
|
5704 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the
|
|
|
5705 b:current_syntax variable does).
|
|
|
5706 This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is
|
|
|
5707 not automatically recognized. Example, for in an IDL file: >
|
|
|
5708 /* vim: set syntax=idl : */
|
|
|
5709 < To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >
|
|
|
5710 :set syntax=OFF
|
|
|
5711 < To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the
|
|
|
5712 'filetype' option: >
|
|
|
5713 :set syntax=ON
|
|
|
5714 < What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the
|
|
|
5715 Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument.
|
|
|
5716 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
|
|
|
5717 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
|
|
36
|
5718 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
|
|
7
|
5719
|
|
|
5720 *'tabstop'* *'ts'*
|
|
|
5721 'tabstop' 'ts' number (default 8)
|
|
|
5722 local to buffer
|
|
|
5723 Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for. Also see
|
|
|
5724 |:retab| command, and 'softtabstop' option.
|
|
|
5725
|
|
|
5726 Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file
|
|
|
5727 appear wrong in many places (e.g., when printing it).
|
|
|
5728
|
|
|
5729 There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim:
|
|
|
5730 1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4
|
|
|
5731 (or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'. Then Vim
|
|
|
5732 will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing Tab and BS will
|
|
|
5733 behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters.
|
|
|
5734 2. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use
|
|
|
5735 'expandtab'. This way you will always insert spaces. The
|
|
|
5736 formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed.
|
|
|
5737 3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a
|
|
10
|
5738 |modeline| to set these values when editing the file again. Only
|
|
7
|
5739 works when using Vim to edit the file.
|
|
|
5740 4. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and
|
|
|
5741 'noexpandtab'. This should then work (for initial indents only)
|
|
|
5742 for any tabstop setting that people use. It might be nice to have
|
|
|
5743 tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this
|
|
|
5744 though. Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is
|
|
|
5745 changed.
|
|
|
5746
|
|
|
5747 *'tagbsearch'* *'tbs'* *'notagbsearch'* *'notbs'*
|
|
|
5748 'tagbsearch' 'tbs' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
5749 global
|
|
|
5750 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5751 When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either
|
|
10
|
5752 use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file. Binary
|
|
7
|
5753 searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search
|
|
|
5754 will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted.
|
|
|
5755 Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that
|
|
|
5756 they are not sorted. Only when this is not the case does the
|
|
|
5757 'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off.
|
|
|
5758
|
|
|
5759 When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags
|
|
10
|
5760 files. In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for
|
|
7
|
5761 certain files, or retry all files with a linear search. When
|
|
|
5762 'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done.
|
|
|
5763
|
|
|
5764 Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line
|
|
|
5765 at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: >
|
|
|
5766 !_TAG_FILE_SORTED 0 /some command/
|
|
|
5767 < [The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>]
|
|
|
5768
|
|
|
5769 When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the
|
|
|
5770 files listed in 'tags', and 'ignorecase' is set or a pattern is used
|
|
|
5771 instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search.
|
|
|
5772 Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only
|
|
|
5773 be found in the retry.
|
|
|
5774
|
|
22
|
5775 If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second,
|
|
7
|
5776 linear search can be avoided for the 'ignorecase' case. Use a value
|
|
|
5777 of '2' in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this. A tag file can be
|
|
|
5778 case-fold sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in
|
|
|
5779 the command: "sort -f -o tags tags". For "Exuberant ctags" version
|
|
|
5780 5.3 or higher the -f or --fold-case-sort switch can be used for this
|
|
|
5781 as well. Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this to work.
|
|
|
5782
|
|
|
5783 When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match
|
|
|
5784 exists, but faster when no full match exists. Tags in unsorted tags
|
|
|
5785 files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off.
|
|
|
5786 When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on
|
|
|
5787 ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above
|
|
|
5788 must be included in the tags file.
|
|
|
5789 This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g.,
|
|
|
5790 command-line completion and ":help").
|
|
|
5791 {Vi: always uses binary search in some versions}
|
|
|
5792
|
|
|
5793 *'taglength'* *'tl'*
|
|
|
5794 'taglength' 'tl' number (default 0)
|
|
|
5795 global
|
|
|
5796 If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters.
|
|
|
5797
|
|
|
5798 *'tagrelative'* *'tr'* *'notagrelative'* *'notr'*
|
|
|
5799 'tagrelative' 'tr' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
|
|
5800 global
|
|
|
5801 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5802 If on and using a tag file in another directory, file names in that
|
|
|
5803 tag file are relative to the directory where the tag file is.
|
|
|
5804 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
5805 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
5806
|
|
|
5807 *'tags'* *'tag'* *E433*
|
|
|
5808 'tags' 'tag' string (default "./tags,tags", when compiled with
|
|
|
5809 |+emacs_tags|: "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS")
|
|
|
5810 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
|
5811 Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas. To
|
|
|
5812 include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with a backslash
|
|
|
5813 (see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes).
|
|
|
5814 When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path
|
|
|
5815 of the current file. But only when the 'd' flag is not included in
|
|
|
5816 'cpoptions'. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. Also see
|
|
|
5817 |tags-option|.
|
|
|
5818 "*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in
|
|
|
5819 a directory tree. See |file-searching|. {not available when compiled
|
|
|
5820 without the |+path_extra| feature}
|
|
|
5821 If Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature, Emacs-style tag
|
|
|
5822 files are also supported. They are automatically recognized. The
|
|
|
5823 default value becomes "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS", unless case
|
|
|
5824 differences are ignored (MS-Windows). |emacs-tags|
|
|
|
5825 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
|
5826 file names from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
|
5827 uses another default.
|
|
|
5828 {Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"}
|
|
|
5829
|
|
|
5830 *'tagstack'* *'tgst'* *'notagstack'* *'notgst'*
|
|
|
5831 'tagstack' 'tgst' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
5832 global
|
|
|
5833 {not in all versions of Vi}
|
|
|
5834 When on, the |tagstack| is used normally. When off, a ":tag" or
|
|
|
5835 ":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the
|
|
|
5836 tagstack. A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or
|
|
|
5837 any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified
|
|
|
5838 tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry.
|
|
|
5839 Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a
|
|
|
5840 mapping which should not change the tagstack.
|
|
|
5841
|
|
|
5842 *'term'* *E529* *E530* *E531*
|
|
|
5843 'term' string (default is $TERM, if that fails:
|
|
|
5844 in the GUI: "builtin_gui"
|
|
|
5845 on Amiga: "amiga"
|
|
|
5846 on BeOS: "beos-ansi"
|
|
|
5847 on Mac: "mac-ansi"
|
|
|
5848 on MiNT: "vt52"
|
|
|
5849 on MS-DOS: "pcterm"
|
|
|
5850 on OS/2: "os2ansi"
|
|
|
5851 on Unix: "ansi"
|
|
|
5852 on VMS: "ansi"
|
|
|
5853 on Win 32: "win32")
|
|
|
5854 global
|
|
|
5855 Name of the terminal. Used for choosing the terminal control
|
|
|
5856 characters. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
|
5857 For example: >
|
|
|
5858 :set term=$TERM
|
|
|
5859 < See |termcap|.
|
|
|
5860
|
|
|
5861 *'termbidi'* *'tbidi'*
|
|
|
5862 *'notermbidi'* *'notbidi'*
|
|
|
5863 'termbidi' 'tbidi' boolean (default off, on for "mlterm")
|
|
|
5864 global
|
|
|
5865 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5866 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
|
|
|
5867 feature}
|
|
|
5868 The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified
|
|
|
5869 by Unicode). The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping
|
|
|
5870 that some languages (such as Arabic) require.
|
|
|
5871 Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when
|
|
|
5872 'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored.
|
|
|
5873 Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that
|
|
|
5874 'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically.
|
|
|
5875 This option is reset when the GUI is started.
|
|
|
5876 For further details see |arabic.txt|.
|
|
|
5877
|
|
|
5878 *'termencoding'* *'tenc'*
|
|
|
5879 'termencoding' 'tenc' string (default ""; with GTK+ 2 GUI: "utf-8"; with
|
|
|
5880 Macintosh GUI: "macroman")
|
|
|
5881 global
|
|
|
5882 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
|
5883 feature}
|
|
|
5884 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5885 Encoding used for the terminal. This specifies what character
|
|
|
5886 encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand. For
|
|
|
5887 the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the
|
|
|
5888 display).
|
|
|
5889 In the Win32 console version the default value is the console codepage
|
|
|
5890 when it differs from the ANSI codepage.
|
|
|
5891 *E617*
|
|
|
5892 Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ 2 GUI. After the GUI has been
|
|
|
5893 successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8".
|
|
|
5894 Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error
|
|
|
5895 message is shown.
|
|
|
5896 For the Win32 GUI 'termencoding' is not used for typed characters,
|
|
|
5897 because the Win32 system always passes Unicode characters.
|
|
|
5898 When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option.
|
|
|
5899 This is the normal value.
|
|
|
5900 Not all combinations for 'termencoding' and 'encoding' are valid. See
|
|
|
5901 |encoding-table|.
|
|
|
5902 The value for this option must be supported by internal conversions or
|
|
|
5903 iconv(). When this is not possible no conversion will be done and you
|
|
|
5904 will probably experience problems with non-ASCII characters.
|
|
|
5905 Example: You are working with the locale set to euc-jp (Japanese) and
|
|
|
5906 want to edit a UTF-8 file: >
|
|
|
5907 :let &termencoding = &encoding
|
|
|
5908 :set encoding=utf-8
|
|
|
5909 < You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8.
|
|
|
5910
|
|
|
5911 *'terse'* *'noterse'*
|
|
|
5912 'terse' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
5913 global
|
|
|
5914 When set: Add 's' flag to 'shortmess' option (this makes the message
|
|
|
5915 for a search that hits the start or end of the file not being
|
|
|
5916 displayed). When reset: Remove 's' flag from 'shortmess' option. {Vi
|
|
|
5917 shortens a lot of messages}
|
|
|
5918
|
|
|
5919 *'textauto'* *'ta'* *'notextauto'* *'nota'*
|
|
|
5920 'textauto' 'ta' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
|
|
5921 global
|
|
|
5922 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5923 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformats'.
|
|
|
5924 For backwards compatibility, when 'textauto' is set, 'fileformats' is
|
|
|
5925 set to the default value for the current system. When 'textauto' is
|
|
|
5926 reset, 'fileformats' is made empty.
|
|
|
5927 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
5928 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
5929
|
|
|
5930 *'textmode'* *'tx'* *'notextmode'* *'notx'*
|
|
|
5931 'textmode' 'tx' boolean (MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: default on,
|
|
|
5932 others: default off)
|
|
|
5933 local to buffer
|
|
|
5934 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5935 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformat'.
|
|
|
5936 For backwards compatibility, when 'textmode' is set, 'fileformat' is
|
|
|
5937 set to "dos". When 'textmode' is reset, 'fileformat' is set to
|
|
|
5938 "unix".
|
|
|
5939
|
|
|
5940 *'textwidth'* *'tw'*
|
|
|
5941 'textwidth' 'tw' number (default 0)
|
|
|
5942 local to buffer
|
|
|
5943 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5944 Maximum width of text that is being inserted. A longer line will be
|
|
|
5945 broken after white space to get this width. A zero value disables
|
|
10
|
5946 this. 'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set. When
|
|
|
5947 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used. See also
|
|
7
|
5948 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
|
|
|
5949 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
5950
|
|
|
5951 *'thesaurus'* *'tsr'*
|
|
|
5952 'thesaurus' 'tsr' string (default "")
|
|
|
5953 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
|
5954 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5955 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
|
|
10
|
5956 for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|. Each line in
|
|
7
|
5957 the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by
|
|
|
5958 non-keyword characters (white space is preferred). Maximum line
|
|
|
5959 length is 510 bytes.
|
|
|
5960 To obtain a file to be used here, check out the wordlist FAQ at
|
|
|
5961 http://www.hyphenologist.co.uk .
|
|
10
|
5962 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces
|
|
7
|
5963 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
|
|
|
5964 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
|
|
|
5965 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
|
5966 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
|
5967 uses another default.
|
|
|
5968 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
|
|
|
5969
|
|
|
5970 *'tildeop'* *'top'* *'notildeop'* *'notop'*
|
|
|
5971 'tildeop' 'top' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
5972 global
|
|
|
5973 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5974 When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator.
|
|
|
5975 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
5976
|
|
|
5977 *'timeout'* *'to'* *'notimeout'* *'noto'*
|
|
|
5978 'timeout' 'to' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
5979 global
|
|
|
5980 *'ttimeout'* *'nottimeout'*
|
|
|
5981 'ttimeout' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
5982 global
|
|
|
5983 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
5984 These two options together determine the behavior when part of a
|
|
|
5985 mapped key sequence or keyboard code has been received:
|
|
|
5986
|
|
|
5987 'timeout' 'ttimeout' action ~
|
|
|
5988 off off do not time out
|
|
|
5989 on on or off time out on :mappings and key codes
|
|
|
5990 off on time out on key codes
|
|
|
5991
|
|
|
5992 If both options are off, Vim will wait until either the complete
|
|
|
5993 mapping or key sequence has been received, or it is clear that there
|
|
|
5994 is no mapping or key sequence for the received characters. For
|
|
|
5995 example: if you have mapped "vl" and Vim has received 'v', the next
|
|
|
5996 character is needed to see if the 'v' is followed by an 'l'.
|
|
|
5997 When one of the options is on, Vim will wait for about 1 second for
|
|
|
5998 the next character to arrive. After that the already received
|
|
|
5999 characters are interpreted as single characters. The waiting time can
|
|
|
6000 be changed with the 'timeoutlen' option.
|
|
|
6001 On slow terminals or very busy systems timing out may cause
|
|
|
6002 malfunctioning cursor keys. If both options are off, Vim waits
|
|
|
6003 forever after an entered <Esc> if there are key codes that start
|
|
|
6004 with <Esc>. You will have to type <Esc> twice. If you do not have
|
|
|
6005 problems with key codes, but would like to have :mapped key
|
|
|
6006 sequences not timing out in 1 second, set the 'ttimeout' option and
|
|
|
6007 reset the 'timeout' option.
|
|
|
6008
|
|
|
6009 NOTE: 'ttimeout' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
|
6010
|
|
|
6011 *'timeoutlen'* *'tm'*
|
|
|
6012 'timeoutlen' 'tm' number (default 1000)
|
|
|
6013 global
|
|
|
6014 {not in all versions of Vi}
|
|
|
6015 *'ttimeoutlen'* *'ttm'*
|
|
|
6016 'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm' number (default -1)
|
|
|
6017 global
|
|
|
6018 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6019 The time in milliseconds that is waited for a key code or mapped key
|
|
|
6020 sequence to complete. Also used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G
|
|
|
6021 when part of a command has been typed.
|
|
|
6022 Normally only 'timeoutlen' is used and 'ttimeoutlen' is -1. When a
|
|
|
6023 different timeout value for key codes is desired set 'ttimeoutlen' to
|
|
|
6024 a non-negative number.
|
|
|
6025
|
|
|
6026 ttimeoutlen mapping delay key code delay ~
|
|
|
6027 < 0 'timeoutlen' 'timeoutlen'
|
|
|
6028 >= 0 'timeoutlen' 'ttimeoutlen'
|
|
|
6029
|
|
|
6030 The timeout only happens when the 'timeout' and 'ttimeout' options
|
|
|
6031 tell so. A useful setting would be >
|
|
|
6032 :set timeout timeoutlen=3000 ttimeoutlen=100
|
|
|
6033 < (time out on mapping after three seconds, time out on key codes after
|
|
|
6034 a tenth of a second).
|
|
|
6035
|
|
|
6036 *'title'* *'notitle'*
|
|
|
6037 'title' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)
|
|
|
6038 global
|
|
|
6039 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6040 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
|
|
6041 feature}
|
|
|
6042 When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of
|
|
|
6043 'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to:
|
|
|
6044 filename [+=-] (path) - VIM
|
|
|
6045 Where:
|
|
|
6046 filename the name of the file being edited
|
|
|
6047 - indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off
|
|
|
6048 + indicates the file was modified
|
|
|
6049 = indicates the file is read-only
|
|
|
6050 =+ indicates the file is read-only and modified
|
|
|
6051 (path) is the path of the file being edited
|
|
|
6052 - VIM the server name |v:servername| or "VIM"
|
|
|
6053 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles
|
|
|
6054 (currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and
|
|
|
6055 terminals with a non- empty 't_ts' option - these are Unix xterm and
|
|
|
6056 iris-ansi by default, where 't_ts' is taken from the builtin termcap).
|
|
|
6057 *X11*
|
|
|
6058 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
|
|
|
6059 be restored if possible. The output of ":version" will include "+X11"
|
|
|
6060 when HAVE_X11 was defined, otherwise it will be "-X11". This also
|
|
|
6061 works for the icon name |'icon'|.
|
|
|
6062 But: When Vim was started with the |-X| argument, restoring the title
|
|
|
6063 will not work (except in the GUI).
|
|
|
6064 If the title cannot be restored, it is set to the value of 'titleold'.
|
|
|
6065 You might want to restore the title outside of Vim then.
|
|
|
6066 When using an xterm from a remote machine you can use this command:
|
|
|
6067 rsh machine_name xterm -display $DISPLAY &
|
|
|
6068 then the WINDOWID environment variable should be inherited and the
|
|
|
6069 title of the window should change back to what it should be after
|
|
|
6070 exiting Vim.
|
|
|
6071
|
|
|
6072 *'titlelen'*
|
|
|
6073 'titlelen' number (default 85)
|
|
|
6074 global
|
|
|
6075 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6076 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
|
|
6077 feature}
|
|
|
6078 Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window
|
|
10
|
6079 title. When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is
|
|
|
6080 shown. A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this.
|
|
7
|
6081 Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window. But
|
|
|
6082 it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters
|
|
|
6083 available also depends on the font used and other things in the title
|
|
|
6084 bar. When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used. Otherwise,
|
|
|
6085 values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used.
|
|
|
6086 'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option.
|
|
|
6087
|
|
|
6088 *'titleold'*
|
|
|
6089 'titleold' string (default "Thanks for flying Vim")
|
|
|
6090 global
|
|
|
6091 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6092 {only available when compiled with the |+title|
|
|
|
6093 feature}
|
|
|
6094 This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the
|
|
|
6095 original title cannot be restored. Only happens if 'title' is on or
|
|
|
6096 'titlestring' is not empty.
|
|
36
|
6097 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
6098 security reasons.
|
|
7
|
6099 *'titlestring'*
|
|
|
6100 'titlestring' string (default "")
|
|
|
6101 global
|
|
|
6102 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6103 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
|
|
6104 feature}
|
|
|
6105 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the
|
|
|
6106 window. This happens only when the 'title' option is on.
|
|
|
6107 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently
|
|
|
6108 Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a
|
|
|
6109 non-empty 't_ts' option).
|
|
|
6110 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
|
|
|
6111 be restored if possible |X11|.
|
|
|
6112 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
|
|
|
6113 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.
|
|
|
6114 Example: >
|
|
|
6115 :auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() . "/" . expand("%:p")
|
|
|
6116 :set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70
|
|
|
6117 < The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right
|
|
|
6118 of the available space.
|
|
|
6119 Some people prefer to have the file name first: >
|
|
|
6120 :set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%)
|
|
|
6121 < Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file,
|
|
10
|
6122 without the file name. The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a
|
|
7
|
6123 separating space only when needed.
|
|
|
6124 NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display
|
|
|
6125 to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character).
|
|
|
6126 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}
|
|
|
6127
|
|
|
6128 *'toolbar'* *'tb'*
|
|
|
6129 'toolbar' 'tb' string (default "icons,tooltips")
|
|
|
6130 global
|
|
|
6131 {only for |+GUI_GTK|, |+GUI_Athena|, |+GUI_Motif| and
|
|
|
6132 |+GUI_Photon|}
|
|
10
|
6133 The contents of this option controls various toolbar settings. The
|
|
7
|
6134 possible values are:
|
|
|
6135 icons Toolbar buttons are shown with icons.
|
|
|
6136 text Toolbar buttons shown with text.
|
|
|
6137 horiz Icon and text of a toolbar button are
|
|
10
|
6138 horizontally arranged. {only in GTK+ 2 GUI}
|
|
7
|
6139 tooltips Tooltips are active for toolbar buttons.
|
|
|
6140 Tooltips refer to the popup help text which appears after the mouse
|
|
|
6141 cursor is placed over a toolbar button for a brief moment.
|
|
|
6142
|
|
|
6143 If you want the toolbar to be shown with icons as well as text, do the
|
|
|
6144 following: >
|
|
|
6145 :set tb=icons,text
|
|
|
6146 < Motif and Athena cannot display icons and text at the same time. They
|
|
|
6147 will show icons if both are requested.
|
|
|
6148
|
|
|
6149 If none of the strings specified in 'toolbar' are valid or if
|
|
|
6150 'toolbar' is empty, this option is ignored. If you want to disable
|
|
|
6151 the toolbar, you need to set the 'guioptions' option. For example: >
|
|
|
6152 :set guioptions-=T
|
|
|
6153 < Also see |gui-toolbar|.
|
|
|
6154
|
|
|
6155 *'toolbariconsize'* *'tbis'*
|
|
|
6156 'toolbariconsize' 'tbis' string (default "small")
|
|
|
6157 global
|
|
|
6158 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6159 {only in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
|
|
|
6160 Controls the size of toolbar icons. The possible values are:
|
|
|
6161 tiny Use tiny toolbar icons.
|
|
|
6162 small Use small toolbar icons (default).
|
|
|
6163 medium Use medium-sized toolbar icons.
|
|
|
6164 large Use large toolbar icons.
|
|
|
6165 The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on
|
|
|
6166 the current theme. Common dimensions are large=32x32, medium=24x24,
|
|
|
6167 small=20x20 and tiny=16x16.
|
|
|
6168
|
|
|
6169 If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined
|
|
|
6170 by user preferences or the current theme is used.
|
|
|
6171
|
|
|
6172 *'ttybuiltin'* *'tbi'* *'nottybuiltin'* *'notbi'*
|
|
|
6173 'ttybuiltin' 'tbi' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
6174 global
|
|
|
6175 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6176 When on, the builtin termcaps are searched before the external ones.
|
|
|
6177 When off the builtin termcaps are searched after the external ones.
|
|
|
6178 When this option is changed, you should set the 'term' option next for
|
|
|
6179 the change to take effect, for example: >
|
|
|
6180 :set notbi term=$TERM
|
|
|
6181 < See also |termcap|.
|
|
|
6182 Rationale: The default for this option is "on", because the builtin
|
|
|
6183 termcap entries are generally better (many systems contain faulty
|
|
|
6184 xterm entries...).
|
|
|
6185
|
|
|
6186 *'ttyfast'* *'tf'* *'nottyfast'* *'notf'*
|
|
|
6187 'ttyfast' 'tf' boolean (default off, on when 'term' is xterm, hpterm,
|
|
|
6188 sun-cmd, screen, rxvt, dtterm or
|
|
|
6189 iris-ansi; also on when running Vim in
|
|
|
6190 a DOS console)
|
|
|
6191 global
|
|
|
6192 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6193 Indicates a fast terminal connection. More characters will be sent to
|
|
|
6194 the screen for redrawing, instead of using insert/delete line
|
|
|
6195 commands. Improves smoothness of redrawing when there are multiple
|
|
|
6196 windows and the terminal does not support a scrolling region.
|
|
|
6197 Also enables the extra writing of characters at the end of each screen
|
|
|
6198 line for lines that wrap. This helps when using copy/paste with the
|
|
|
6199 mouse in an xterm and other terminals.
|
|
|
6200
|
|
|
6201 *'ttymouse'* *'ttym'*
|
|
|
6202 'ttymouse' 'ttym' string (default depends on 'term')
|
|
|
6203 global
|
|
|
6204 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6205 {only in Unix and VMS, doesn't work in the GUI; not
|
|
|
6206 available when compiled without |+mouse|}
|
|
|
6207 Name of the terminal type for which mouse codes are to be recognized.
|
|
|
6208 Currently these three strings are valid:
|
|
|
6209 *xterm-mouse*
|
|
|
6210 xterm xterm-like mouse handling. The mouse generates
|
|
|
6211 "<Esc>[Mscr", where "scr" is three bytes:
|
|
|
6212 "s" = button state
|
|
|
6213 "c" = column plus 33
|
|
|
6214 "r" = row plus 33
|
|
|
6215 xterm2 Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the
|
|
|
6216 mouse position while the mouse is dragged. This works
|
|
|
6217 much faster and more precise. Your xterm must at
|
|
|
6218 least at patchlevel 88 / XFree 3.3.3 for this to
|
|
|
6219 work. See below for how Vim detects this
|
|
|
6220 automatically.
|
|
|
6221 *netterm-mouse*
|
|
|
6222 netterm NetTerm mouse handling. The mouse generates
|
|
|
6223 "<Esc>}r,c<CR>", where "r,c" are two decimal numbers
|
|
|
6224 for the row and column.
|
|
|
6225 *dec-mouse*
|
|
|
6226 dec DEC terminal mouse handling. The mouse generates a
|
|
|
6227 rather complex sequence, starting with "<Esc>[".
|
|
|
6228 *jsbterm-mouse*
|
|
|
6229 jsbterm JSB term mouse handling.
|
|
|
6230 *pterm-mouse*
|
|
|
6231 pterm QNX pterm mouse handling.
|
|
|
6232
|
|
|
6233 The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm|
|
|
|
6234 |+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm|.
|
|
|
6235 Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized. NetTerm mouse codes are always
|
|
|
6236 recognized, if enabled at compile time. DEC terminal mouse codes
|
|
|
6237 are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not
|
|
|
6238 "xterm" (because the xterm and dec mouse codes conflict).
|
|
|
6239 This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is
|
|
|
6240 set to a name that starts with "xterm", and 'ttymouse' is not "xterm"
|
|
|
6241 or "xterm2" already. The main use of this option is to set it to
|
|
|
6242 "xterm", when the terminal name doesn't start with "xterm", but it can
|
|
|
6243 handle xterm mouse codes.
|
|
|
6244 The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be
|
|
|
6245 95 of higher. This only works when compiled with the |+termresponse|
|
|
|
6246 feature and if |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the
|
|
|
6247 xterm version number. Otherwise "xterm2" must be set explicitly.
|
|
|
6248 If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" automatically, set
|
|
|
6249 t_RV to an empty string: >
|
|
|
6250 :set t_RV=
|
|
|
6251 <
|
|
|
6252 *'ttyscroll'* *'tsl'*
|
|
|
6253 'ttyscroll' 'tsl' number (default 999)
|
|
|
6254 global
|
|
|
6255 Maximum number of lines to scroll the screen. If there are more lines
|
|
|
6256 to scroll the window is redrawn. For terminals where scrolling is
|
|
|
6257 very slow and redrawing is not slow this can be set to a small number,
|
|
|
6258 e.g., 3, to speed up displaying.
|
|
|
6259
|
|
|
6260 *'ttytype'* *'tty'*
|
|
|
6261 'ttytype' 'tty' string (default from $TERM)
|
|
|
6262 global
|
|
|
6263 Alias for 'term', see above.
|
|
|
6264
|
|
|
6265 *'undolevels'* *'ul'*
|
|
|
6266 'undolevels' 'ul' number (default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS,
|
|
|
6267 Win32 and OS/2)
|
|
|
6268 global
|
|
|
6269 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6270 Maximum number of changes that can be undone. Since undo information
|
|
|
6271 is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used
|
|
|
6272 (nevertheless, a single change can use an unlimited amount of memory).
|
|
|
6273 Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes
|
|
|
6274 itself: >
|
|
|
6275 set ul=0
|
|
|
6276 < But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in
|
|
|
6277 'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo.
|
|
|
6278 Set to a negative number for no undo at all: >
|
|
|
6279 set ul=-1
|
|
|
6280 < This helps when you run out of memory for a single change.
|
|
|
6281 Also see |undo-two-ways|.
|
|
|
6282
|
|
|
6283 *'updatecount'* *'uc'*
|
|
|
6284 'updatecount' 'uc' number (default: 200)
|
|
|
6285 global
|
|
|
6286 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6287 After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to
|
|
|
6288 disk. When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on
|
|
|
6289 recovery |crash-recovery|). 'updatecount' is set to zero by starting
|
|
|
6290 Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|. When editing in readonly
|
|
|
6291 mode this option will be initialized to 10000.
|
|
|
6292 The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with |'swapfile'|.
|
|
|
6293 When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are
|
|
|
6294 created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set. When 'updatecount'
|
|
|
6295 is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted.
|
|
|
6296 Also see |'swapsync'|.
|
|
|
6297 This option has no meaning in buffers where |'buftype'| is "nofile"
|
|
|
6298 or "nowrite".
|
|
|
6299
|
|
|
6300 *'updatetime'* *'ut'*
|
|
|
6301 'updatetime' 'ut' number (default 4000)
|
|
|
6302 global
|
|
|
6303 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6304 If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be
|
|
|
6305 written to disk (see |crash-recovery|). Also used for the
|
|
|
6306 |CursorHold| autocommand event.
|
|
|
6307
|
|
|
6308 *'verbose'* *'vbs'*
|
|
|
6309 'verbose' 'vbs' number (default 0)
|
|
|
6310 global
|
|
|
6311 {not in Vi, although some versions have a boolean
|
|
|
6312 verbose option}
|
|
|
6313 When bigger than zero, Vim will give messages about what it is doing.
|
|
|
6314 Currently, these messages are given:
|
|
|
6315 >= 1 When the viminfo file is read or written.
|
|
|
6316 >= 2 When a file is ":source"'ed.
|
|
|
6317 >= 5 Every searched tags file.
|
|
|
6318 >= 8 Files for which a group of autocommands is executed.
|
|
|
6319 >= 9 Every executed autocommand.
|
|
|
6320 >= 12 Every executed function.
|
|
|
6321 >= 13 When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded.
|
|
|
6322 >= 14 Anything pending in a ":finally" clause.
|
|
|
6323 >= 15 Every executed Ex command (truncated at 200 characters).
|
|
|
6324
|
|
|
6325 This option can also be set with the "-V" argument. See |-V|.
|
|
|
6326 This option is also set by the |:verbose| command.
|
|
|
6327
|
|
|
6328 *'viewdir'* *'vdir'*
|
|
|
6329 'viewdir' 'vdir' string (default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32:
|
|
|
6330 "$VIM/vimfiles/view",
|
|
|
6331 for Unix: "~/.vim/view",
|
|
|
6332 for Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles:view"
|
|
|
6333 for VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles/view"
|
|
|
6334 for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view")
|
|
|
6335 global
|
|
|
6336 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6337 {not available when compiled without the +mksession
|
|
|
6338 feature}
|
|
|
6339 Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|.
|
|
|
6340 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
6341 security reasons.
|
|
|
6342
|
|
|
6343 *'viewoptions'* *'vop'*
|
|
|
6344 'viewoptions' 'vop' string (default: "folds,options,cursor")
|
|
|
6345 global
|
|
|
6346 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6347 {not available when compiled without the +mksession
|
|
|
6348 feature}
|
|
|
6349 Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command. It is a comma separated
|
|
10
|
6350 list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring something:
|
|
7
|
6351 word save and restore ~
|
|
|
6352 cursor cursor position in file and in window
|
|
|
6353 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
|
|
|
6354 fold options
|
|
|
6355 options options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
|
|
|
6356 global values for local options)
|
|
|
6357 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward
|
|
|
6358 slashes
|
|
|
6359 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
|
|
|
6360 on Windows or DOS
|
|
|
6361
|
|
|
6362 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files
|
|
|
6363 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
|
|
|
6364 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.
|
|
|
6365
|
|
|
6366 *'viminfo'* *'vi'* *E526* *E527* *E528*
|
|
|
6367 'viminfo' 'vi' string (Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS,
|
|
|
6368 Windows and OS/2: '20,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:,
|
|
|
6369 for Amiga: '20,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:
|
|
|
6370 for others: '20,<50,s10,h)
|
|
|
6371 global
|
|
|
6372 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6373 {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo|
|
|
|
6374 feature}
|
|
|
6375 When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written
|
|
10
|
6376 when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|). The string should be a comma
|
|
7
|
6377 separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character
|
|
|
6378 identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string
|
|
|
6379 which specifies the value of that parameter. If a particular
|
|
|
6380 character is left out, then the default value is used for that
|
|
|
6381 parameter. The following is a list of the identifying characters and
|
|
|
6382 the effect of their value.
|
|
|
6383 CHAR VALUE ~
|
|
|
6384 ! When included, save and restore global variables that start
|
|
|
6385 with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
|
|
|
6386 letter. Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
|
|
|
6387 and "_K_L_M" are not.
|
|
|
6388 " Maximum number of lines saved for each register. Old name of
|
|
|
6389 the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
|
|
|
6390 backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
|
|
|
6391 start of a comment!
|
|
|
6392 % When included, save and restore the buffer list. If Vim is
|
|
|
6393 started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
|
|
|
6394 restored. If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
|
|
10
|
6395 buffer list is restored from the viminfo file. Buffers
|
|
7
|
6396 without a file name and buffers for help files are not written
|
|
|
6397 to the viminfo file.
|
|
23
|
6398 When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum
|
|
|
6399 number of buffers that are stored. Without a number all
|
|
|
6400 buffers are stored.
|
|
7
|
6401 ' Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks
|
|
|
6402 are remembered. This parameter must always be included when
|
|
|
6403 'viminfo' is non-empty.
|
|
|
6404 Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the
|
|
|
6405 |changelist| are stored in the viminfo file.
|
|
|
6406 / Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be
|
|
10
|
6407 saved. If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute
|
|
7
|
6408 patterns are also saved. When not included, the value of
|
|
|
6409 'history' is used.
|
|
|
6410 : Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be
|
|
10
|
6411 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
|
|
7
|
6412 < Maximum number of lines saved for each register. If zero then
|
|
|
6413 registers are not saved. When not included, all lines are
|
|
|
6414 saved. '"' is the old name for this item.
|
|
|
6415 Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte.
|
|
|
6416 @ Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be
|
|
10
|
6417 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
|
|
7
|
6418 c When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the
|
|
|
6419 'encoding' used when writing the file to the current
|
|
|
6420 'encoding'. See |viminfo-encoding|.
|
|
|
6421 f Whether file marks need to be stored. If zero, file marks ('0
|
|
|
6422 to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored. When not present or when
|
|
10
|
6423 non-zero, they are all stored. '0 is used for the current
|
|
7
|
6424 cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo").
|
|
|
6425 h Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo
|
|
|
6426 file. When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"
|
|
|
6427 has been used since the last search command.
|
|
|
6428 n Name of the viminfo file. The name must immediately follow
|
|
|
6429 the 'n'. Must be the last one! If the "-i" argument was
|
|
|
6430 given when starting Vim, that file name overrides the one
|
|
|
6431 given here with 'viminfo'. Environment variables are expanded
|
|
|
6432 when opening the file, not when setting the option.
|
|
|
6433 r Removable media. The argument is a string (up to the next
|
|
|
6434 ','). This parameter can be given several times. Each
|
|
|
6435 specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be
|
|
|
6436 stored. This is to avoid removable media. For MS-DOS you
|
|
|
6437 could use "ra:,rb:", for Amiga "rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:". You can
|
|
|
6438 also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp". Case is
|
|
|
6439 ignored. Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50
|
|
|
6440 characters.
|
|
|
6441 s Maximum size of an item in Kbyte. If zero then registers are
|
|
|
6442 not saved. Currently only applies to registers. The default
|
|
|
6443 "s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text.
|
|
|
6444 Also see the '<' item above: line count limit.
|
|
|
6445
|
|
|
6446 Example: >
|
|
|
6447 :set viminfo='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/vim/viminfo
|
|
|
6448 <
|
|
|
6449 '50 Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you
|
|
|
6450 edited.
|
|
|
6451 <1000 Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be
|
|
|
6452 remembered.
|
|
|
6453 s100 Registers with more than 100 Kbyte text are skipped.
|
|
|
6454 :0 Command-line history will not be saved.
|
|
|
6455 n~/vim/viminfo The name of the file to use is "~/vim/viminfo".
|
|
|
6456 no / Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used,
|
|
|
6457 that is, save all of the search history, and also the
|
|
|
6458 previous search and substitute patterns.
|
|
|
6459 no % The buffer list will not be saved nor read back.
|
|
|
6460 no h 'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored.
|
|
|
6461
|
|
|
6462 When setting 'viminfo' from an empty value you can use |:rviminfo| to
|
|
|
6463 load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically.
|
|
|
6464
|
|
|
6465 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
|
6466 security reasons.
|
|
|
6467
|
|
|
6468 *'virtualedit'* *'ve'*
|
|
|
6469 'virtualedit' 've' string (default "")
|
|
|
6470 global
|
|
|
6471 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6472 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
|
6473 |+virtualedit| feature}
|
|
|
6474 A comma separated list of these words:
|
|
|
6475 block Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode.
|
|
|
6476 insert Allow virtual editing in Insert mode.
|
|
|
6477 all Allow virtual editing in all modes.
|
|
|
6478 Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is
|
|
|
6479 no actual character. This can be halfway into a Tab or beyond the end
|
|
|
6480 of the line. Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and
|
|
|
6481 editing a table.
|
|
|
6482
|
|
|
6483 *'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'* *beep*
|
|
|
6484 'visualbell' 'vb' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
6485 global
|
|
|
6486 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6487 Use visual bell instead of beeping. The terminal code to display the
|
|
|
6488 visual bell is given with 't_vb'. When no beep or flash is wanted,
|
|
|
6489 use ":set vb t_vb=".
|
|
|
6490 Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value. You
|
|
|
6491 might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|.
|
|
|
6492 In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display
|
|
|
6493 for 20 msec. If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f",
|
|
|
6494 where 40 is the time in msec.
|
|
|
6495 Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash.
|
|
|
6496 Also see 'errorbells'.
|
|
|
6497
|
|
|
6498 *'warn'* *'nowarn'*
|
|
|
6499 'warn' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
6500 global
|
|
|
6501 Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer
|
|
|
6502 has been changed.
|
|
|
6503
|
|
|
6504 *'weirdinvert'* *'wiv'* *'noweirdinvert'* *'nowiv'*
|
|
|
6505 'weirdinvert' 'wiv' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
6506 global
|
|
|
6507 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6508 This option has the same effect as the 't_xs' termcap option.
|
|
|
6509 It is provided for backwards compatibility with version 4.x.
|
|
|
6510 Setting 'weirdinvert' has the effect of making 't_xs' non-empty, and
|
|
|
6511 vice versa. Has no effect when the GUI is running.
|
|
|
6512
|
|
|
6513 *'whichwrap'* *'ww'*
|
|
|
6514 'whichwrap' 'ww' string (Vim default: "b,s", Vi default: "")
|
|
|
6515 global
|
|
|
6516 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6517 Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the
|
|
|
6518 previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in
|
|
|
6519 the line. Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys:
|
|
|
6520 char key mode ~
|
|
|
6521 b <BS> Normal and Visual
|
|
|
6522 s <Space> Normal and Visual
|
|
|
6523 h "h" Normal and Visual
|
|
|
6524 l "l" Normal and Visual
|
|
|
6525 < <Left> Normal and Visual
|
|
|
6526 > <Right> Normal and Visual
|
|
|
6527 ~ "~" Normal
|
|
|
6528 [ <Left> Insert and Replace
|
|
|
6529 ] <Right> Insert and Replace
|
|
|
6530 For example: >
|
|
|
6531 :set ww=<,>,[,]
|
|
|
6532 < allows wrap only when cursor keys are used.
|
|
|
6533 When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change
|
|
|
6534 operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character. This makes "3h"
|
|
|
6535 different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line. This
|
|
|
6536 is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and
|
|
|
6537 "dh". If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping
|
|
|
6538 ":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the
|
|
|
6539 cursor.
|
|
|
6540 When 'l' is included, you get a side effect: "yl" on an empty line
|
|
|
6541 will include the <EOL>, so that "p" will insert a new line.
|
|
|
6542 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
6543 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
6544
|
|
|
6545 *'wildchar'* *'wc'*
|
|
|
6546 'wildchar' 'wc' number (Vim default: <Tab>, Vi default: CTRL-E)
|
|
|
6547 global
|
|
|
6548 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6549 Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the
|
|
|
6550 command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'.
|
|
|
6551 The character is not recognized when used inside a macro. See
|
|
|
6552 'wildcharm' for that.
|
|
|
6553 Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key: >
|
|
|
6554 :set wc=<Esc>
|
|
|
6555 < NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
6556 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
|
6557
|
|
|
6558 *'wildcharm'* *'wcm'*
|
|
|
6559 'wildcharm' 'wcm' number (default: none (0))
|
|
|
6560 global
|
|
|
6561 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6562 'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is
|
|
|
6563 recognized when used inside a macro. You can find "spare" command-line
|
|
|
6564 keys suitable for this option by looking at |ex-edit-index|. Normally
|
|
|
6565 you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that
|
|
|
6566 automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.: >
|
|
|
6567 :set wcm=<C-Z>
|
|
|
6568 :cmap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z>
|
|
|
6569 < Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N.
|
|
|
6570
|
|
|
6571 *'wildignore'* *'wig'*
|
|
|
6572 'wildignore' 'wig' string (default "")
|
|
|
6573 global
|
|
|
6574 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6575 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
|
|
|
6576 feature}
|
|
|
6577 A list of file patterns. A file that matches with one of these
|
|
|
6578 patterns is ignored when completing file or directory names.
|
|
|
6579 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
|
|
|
6580 Also see 'suffixes'.
|
|
|
6581 Example: >
|
|
|
6582 :set wildignore=*.o,*.obj
|
|
|
6583 < The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
|
6584 a pattern from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
|
6585 uses another default.
|
|
|
6586
|
|
|
6587 *'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'*
|
|
|
6588 'wildmenu' 'wmnu' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
6589 global
|
|
|
6590 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6591 {not available if compiled without the |+wildmenu|
|
|
|
6592 feature}
|
|
|
6593 When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced
|
|
|
6594 mode. On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion,
|
|
|
6595 the possible matches are shown just above the command line, with the
|
|
|
6596 first match highlighted (overwriting the status line, if there is
|
|
|
6597 one). Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or
|
|
|
6598 CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match.
|
|
|
6599 When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is
|
|
|
6600 specified. "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode.
|
|
|
6601 If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on
|
|
|
6602 the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left. The status line scrolls
|
|
|
6603 as needed.
|
|
|
6604 The "wildmenu" mode is abandoned when a key is hit that is not used
|
|
|
6605 for selecting a completion.
|
|
|
6606 While the "wildmenu" is active the following keys have special
|
|
|
6607 meanings:
|
|
|
6608
|
|
|
6609 <Left> <Right> - select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N)
|
|
|
6610 <Down> - in filename/menu name completion: move into a
|
|
|
6611 subdirectory or submenu.
|
|
|
6612 <CR> - in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a
|
|
|
6613 dot: move into a submenu.
|
|
|
6614 <Up> - in filename/menu name completion: move up into
|
|
|
6615 parent directory or parent menu.
|
|
|
6616
|
|
|
6617 This makes the menus accessible from the console |console-menus|.
|
|
|
6618
|
|
|
6619 If you prefer the <Left> and <Right> keys to move the cursor instead
|
|
|
6620 of selecting a different match, use this: >
|
|
|
6621 :cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left>
|
|
|
6622 :cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right>
|
|
|
6623 <
|
|
|
6624 The "WildMenu" highlighting is used for displaying the current match
|
|
|
6625 |hl-WildMenu|.
|
|
|
6626
|
|
|
6627 *'wildmode'* *'wim'*
|
|
|
6628 'wildmode' 'wim' string (Vim default: "full")
|
|
|
6629 global
|
|
|
6630 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6631 Completion mode that is used for the character specified with
|
|
10
|
6632 'wildchar'. It is a comma separated list of up to four parts. Each
|
|
7
|
6633 part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar. The
|
|
|
6634 first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar',
|
|
|
6635 The second part for the second use, etc.
|
|
|
6636 These are the possible values for each part:
|
|
|
6637 "" Complete only the first match.
|
|
|
6638 "full" Complete the next full match. After the last match,
|
|
|
6639 the original string is used and then the first match
|
|
|
6640 again.
|
|
|
6641 "longest" Complete till longest common string. If this doesn't
|
|
|
6642 result in a longer string, use the next part.
|
|
|
6643 "longest:full" Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is
|
|
|
6644 enabled.
|
|
|
6645 "list" When more than one match, list all matches.
|
|
|
6646 "list:full" When more than one match, list all matches and
|
|
|
6647 complete first match.
|
|
|
6648 "list:longest" When more than one match, list all matches and
|
|
|
6649 complete till longest common string.
|
|
|
6650 When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases.
|
|
|
6651
|
|
|
6652 Examples: >
|
|
|
6653 :set wildmode=full
|
|
|
6654 < Complete first full match, next match, etc. (the default) >
|
|
|
6655 :set wildmode=longest,full
|
|
|
6656 < Complete longest common string, then each full match >
|
|
|
6657 :set wildmode=list:full
|
|
|
6658 < List all matches and complete each full match >
|
|
|
6659 :set wildmode=list,full
|
|
|
6660 < List all matches without completing, then each full match >
|
|
|
6661 :set wildmode=longest,list
|
|
|
6662 < Complete longest common string, then list alternatives.
|
|
|
6663
|
|
|
6664 *'winaltkeys'* *'wak'*
|
|
|
6665 'winaltkeys' 'wak' string (default "menu")
|
|
|
6666 global
|
|
|
6667 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6668 {only used in Win32, Motif, GTK and Photon GUI}
|
|
|
6669 Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT
|
|
|
6670 key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the
|
|
|
6671 menu. This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and
|
|
|
6672 entering special characters. This option tells what to do:
|
|
|
6673 no Don't use ALT keys for menus. ALT key combinations can be
|
|
|
6674 mapped, but there is no automatic handling. This can then be
|
|
|
6675 done with the |:simalt| command.
|
|
|
6676 yes ALT key handling is done by the windowing system. ALT key
|
|
|
6677 combinations cannot be mapped.
|
|
|
6678 menu Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu
|
|
10
|
6679 shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system. Other
|
|
7
|
6680 keys can be mapped.
|
|
|
6681 If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT
|
|
|
6682 key is never used for the menu.
|
|
36
|
6683 This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32 and with GTK <F10> will
|
|
|
6684 select the menu, unless it has been mapped.
|
|
7
|
6685
|
|
|
6686 *'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591*
|
|
|
6687 'winheight' 'wh' number (default 1)
|
|
|
6688 global
|
|
|
6689 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6690 {not available when compiled without the +windows
|
|
|
6691 feature}
|
|
|
6692 Minimal number of lines for the current window. This is not a hard
|
|
10
|
6693 minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room. If the
|
|
7
|
6694 current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of the
|
|
|
6695 height of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window
|
|
|
6696 always fill the screen (although this has the drawback that ":all"
|
|
|
6697 will create only two windows). Set it to a small number for normal
|
|
|
6698 editing.
|
|
|
6699 Minimum value is 1.
|
|
|
6700 The height is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
|
|
|
6701 height of the current window.
|
|
|
6702 'winheight' applies to the current window. Use 'winminheight' to set
|
|
|
6703 the minimal height for other windows.
|
|
|
6704
|
|
|
6705 *'winfixheight'* *'wfh'* *'nowinfixheight'* *'nowfh'*
|
|
|
6706 'winfixheight' 'wfh' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
6707 local to window
|
|
|
6708 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6709 {not available when compiled without the +windows
|
|
|
6710 feature}
|
|
|
6711 Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and
|
|
|
6712 'equalalways' is set. Set by default for the |preview-window| and
|
|
|
6713 |quickfix-window|.
|
|
|
6714 The height may be changed anyway when running out of room.
|
|
|
6715
|
|
|
6716 *'winminheight'* *'wmh'*
|
|
|
6717 'winminheight' 'wmh' number (default 1)
|
|
|
6718 global
|
|
|
6719 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6720 {not available when compiled without the +windows
|
|
|
6721 feature}
|
|
|
6722 The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window.
|
|
|
6723 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
|
|
|
6724 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a
|
|
|
6725 status bar) if necessary. They will return to at least one line when
|
|
|
6726 they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.)
|
|
|
6727 Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window.
|
|
|
6728 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a
|
|
|
6729 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
|
|
|
6730 windows. A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable.
|
|
|
6731
|
|
|
6732 *'winminwidth'* *'wmw'*
|
|
|
6733 'winminwidth' 'wmw' number (default 1)
|
|
|
6734 global
|
|
|
6735 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6736 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
|
|
|
6737 feature}
|
|
|
6738 The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window.
|
|
|
6739 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
|
|
|
6740 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just
|
|
|
6741 a vertical separator) if necessary. They will return to at least one
|
|
|
6742 line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere
|
|
|
6743 to go.)
|
|
|
6744 Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window.
|
|
|
6745 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a
|
|
|
6746 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
|
|
|
6747 windows. A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.
|
|
|
6748
|
|
|
6749 *'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592*
|
|
|
6750 'winwidth' 'wiw' number (default 20)
|
|
|
6751 global
|
|
|
6752 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6753 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
|
|
|
6754 feature}
|
|
|
6755 Minimal number of columns for the current window. This is not a hard
|
|
|
6756 minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room. If
|
|
|
6757 the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of
|
|
|
6758 the width of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window
|
|
|
6759 always fill the screen. Set it to a small number for normal editing.
|
|
|
6760 The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
|
|
|
6761 width of the current window.
|
|
|
6762 'winwidth' applies to the current window. Use 'winminwidth' to set
|
|
|
6763 the minimal width for other windows.
|
|
|
6764
|
|
|
6765 *'wrap'* *'nowrap'*
|
|
|
6766 'wrap' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
6767 local to window
|
|
|
6768 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6769 This option changes how text is displayed. It doesn't change the text
|
|
|
6770 in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that.
|
|
|
6771 When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and
|
|
10
|
6772 displaying continues on the next line. When off lines will not wrap
|
|
|
6773 and only part of long lines will be displayed. When the cursor is
|
|
7
|
6774 moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll
|
|
|
6775 horizontally.
|
|
|
6776 The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary. See
|
|
|
6777 'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary.
|
|
|
6778 To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: >
|
|
|
6779 :set sidescroll=5
|
|
|
6780 :set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:>
|
|
|
6781 < See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|.
|
|
|
6782
|
|
|
6783 *'wrapmargin'* *'wm'*
|
|
|
6784 'wrapmargin' 'wm' number (default 0)
|
|
|
6785 local to buffer
|
|
|
6786 Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping
|
|
|
6787 starts. When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted
|
|
|
6788 and inserting continues on the next line.
|
|
|
6789 Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause
|
|
|
6790 the text width to be further reduced. This is Vi compatible.
|
|
|
6791 When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used.
|
|
|
6792 See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. {Vi: works differently
|
|
|
6793 and less usefully}
|
|
|
6794
|
|
|
6795 *'wrapscan'* *'ws'* *'nowrapscan'* *'nows'*
|
|
|
6796 'wrapscan' 'ws' boolean (default on) *E384* *E385*
|
|
|
6797 global
|
|
|
6798 Searches wrap around the end of the file.
|
|
|
6799
|
|
|
6800 *'write'* *'nowrite'*
|
|
|
6801 'write' boolean (default on)
|
|
|
6802 global
|
|
|
6803 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6804 Allows writing files. When not set, writing a file is not allowed.
|
|
|
6805 Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are
|
|
10
|
6806 still allowed. Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line
|
|
7
|
6807 argument. Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires
|
|
|
6808 writing a temporary file.
|
|
|
6809
|
|
|
6810 *'writeany'* *'wa'* *'nowriteany'* *'nowa'*
|
|
|
6811 'writeany' 'wa' boolean (default off)
|
|
|
6812 global
|
|
|
6813 Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override.
|
|
|
6814
|
|
|
6815 *'writebackup'* *'wb'* *'nowritebackup'* *'nowb'*
|
|
|
6816 'writebackup' 'wb' boolean (default on with |+writebackup| feature, off
|
|
|
6817 otherwise)
|
|
|
6818 global
|
|
|
6819 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6820 Make a backup before overwriting a file. The backup is removed after
|
|
|
6821 the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
|
|
|
6822 also on. Reset this option if your file system is almost full. See
|
|
|
6823 |backup-table| for another explanation.
|
|
|
6824 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
|
|
|
6825 NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
|
6826 set.
|
|
|
6827
|
|
|
6828 *'writedelay'* *'wd'*
|
|
|
6829 'writedelay' 'wd' number (default 0)
|
|
|
6830 global
|
|
|
6831 {not in Vi}
|
|
|
6832 The number of microseconds to wait for each character sent to the
|
|
|
6833 screen. When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by
|
|
|
6834 one. For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work. For debugging purposes.
|
|
|
6835
|
|
|
6836 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
|
